JP6607363B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine that uses a game ball as a game medium.

Generally, pachinko gaming machines are provided with a main control board that controls the game and a sub-control board that performs control processing based on a command (production control command) from the main control board. Of these, examples of the sub control board include a payout control board, an effect control board, various display control boards, an electrical decoration control board, and an acoustic control board. Further, in some pachinko gaming machines, when the operation of the launch handle has not been performed for a predetermined time or more, the main control board transmits a customer waiting demonstration command (eg, paragraph 0181 of Patent Document 1). Further, paragraph 0055 of Patent Document 2 describes that the number of players is counted based on the touch signal related to the launch handle and the variation state of the decorative design (the state of the effect by the moving image).
Japanese Patent No. 599760 JP 2007-244761 A

  By the way, in pachinko machines, the application of operation detection (also referred to as “touch detection”) related to the launch handle is very limited as disclosed in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2. It has become. This is probably because attention to touch detection is low and few people are aware of the possibility of touch detection. Gaming machines such as pachinko machines are required to have a variety of game characteristics and selections, but it is considered that the diversity of gaming machines can be further improved by examining various control modes based on the detection of handle operation. It is done.

  The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and its purpose is to improve the diversity of gaming machines, and in particular, to make more effective use of detection of the player's operation using a launching handle or the like. Is to provide a pachinko machine that can

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention fires a game ball in a game area, and the game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. As a result of this, a symbol game (special symbol, etc.) is variably displayed as a symbol game, then stopped and displayed, and when the symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a player a profit is performed. A gaming machine,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
Sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing in accordance with transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for producing production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the player's rotation operation,
In the production, there is an output (such as a touch production) triggered by touch detection that is detection of a player's contact by the touch detection means,
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state (such as “B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed, and the symbol game A game running state (such as “B2: gaming state”) in which any of the special games is being executed;
The game standby state includes a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (power saving)”) in which the output contents of the effects by the sub-control means are different. Including
Depending on which of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state, whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or an effect output triggered by the touch detection Are configured to be different ,
As the starting prize opening, a first starting prize opening and a second starting prize opening are provided,
An opening / closing member is attached to the second start winning opening,
The game area is provided with an operating port through which a game ball can enter,
The opening and closing member is driven when a game ball enters the operation port, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning port,
In the situation where the power supply is restored while the touch detection means is in contact before the power is turned on, the effect triggered by the touch detection is not output,
During the output of the effect triggered by the touch detection, when a game ball enters the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, the effect triggered by the touch detection being output is interrupted, Even if a game ball enters the operating port, the pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the production triggered by the touch detection during output is continued without interruption .

  According to the present invention, a variety of gaming machines can be improved, and a pachinko gaming machine capable of more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the launching handle can be provided.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the function of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the main board | substrate structures of a pachinko game machine. (A) is a front view which shows the substrate case of the state which accommodated the main board | substrate, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view which shows schematically the part along the AA line in (a). It is a block diagram which shows the basic functional means of a main board | substrate, a sub main board | substrate, and a sub sub board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main symbol display board of a main control display apparatus. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the change of the effect symbol in an effect display apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display during the stop of an effect symbol similarly. (A) is a chart showing a success / failure determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a deviation variation pattern table. (A) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery, (b) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the second lottery, and (c) is a small hit symbol determination table used at the time of a small hit. FIG. 4D is a chart showing a loss symbol determination table used at the time of loss. FIG. 5B is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of loss, FIG. 5B is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of 15R big hit, and FIG. 5C is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of 5R big hit. Is a chart showing a hit value and a payout rate for each set value. (A) is a chart showing a prefetch determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a prefetch code correspondence table. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows an initial setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the game progress interruption process in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery determination process in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process in a main board | substrate. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state before handle operation, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of handle operation. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the operation button, the cross key, and these periphery from the front upper direction. It is a chart which shows the control element concerning touch detection. FIG. 23 is a chart showing control elements following FIG. 22. (A) is a chart showing the pros and cons of execution of effects according to the state of the gaming machine, and (b) is a chart showing pros and cons of execution of effects following (a). It is a chart shown about production classification for every state of a gaming machine. FIG. 26 is a chart showing the effect types following FIG. (A) is a chart showing production restrictions concerning the second and subsequent touch detections, and (b) is a chart showing production restrictions following (a). It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect output at the time of a setting change. It is a timing chart which shows the example of the production output at the time of environment setting. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect output at the time of reach display. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect output at the time of big hit end demonstration display. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of an effect output at the time of power interruption return when there is a power interruption during game standby, (b) an example of an effect output at the time of power interruption return when there is a power interruption during symbol variation It is a timing chart which shows. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the standby screen A, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the standby screen B, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the display screen C (environment setting screen). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect output at the time of the touch detection at the time of the standby screen A, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the effect output at the time of the touch detection during a change stop. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the energization return screen in the standby screen A, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the energization return screen during symbol fluctuation. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the abnormality display concerning a door opening error, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting change screen A, (b) shows an example of the setting changing screen at the time of the standby screen B It is explanatory drawing. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a normal reach screen, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of SP reach screen, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a jackpot end demonstration screen. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a big hit start demonstration screen, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a screen during a round, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a win-specific identification effect screen. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the hit effect specific effect screen different from FIG.38 (c), (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an effect screen between rounds, (c) is a different hit from (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a medium specific production | presentation screen. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect aspect before a touch effect, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect aspect at the time of a touch effect. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect output before touch notification, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the effect output after touch notification. (A) is a chart showing a selection table of a notice group relating to fluctuation before touch, (b) is a chart showing a selection table of a notice group relating to fluctuation of touch transition, and (c) is a look-ahead notice relating to fluctuation before touch. FIG. 6D is a chart showing a selection table for pre-reading notice relating to a change in touch transition.

Examples of pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention will be described below. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described, and then the gaming procedure, effects, control mode, etc. in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
<Basic configuration of pachinko machine>

  FIG. 1 shows a front configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, a gaming board 50 is mounted on a gaming machine frame 11 described later. Among these, the game board 50 has different components such as accessory devices and designs depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Further, the gaming board 50 can be separated from the gaming machine frame 11 by releasing the electrical connection relationship and the structural connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11.

  Further, by sharing the structural and electrical connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11 for a plurality of types of gaming boards 50, it is possible to change the so-called model in which the gaming machine frame 11 is shared between different models. Yes. In the following, the gaming machine frame 11 will be described first, and then the board configuration of the gaming board 50 will be described.

  The gaming machine frame 11 described above has an outer frame 12, a front frame (also referred to as an “inner frame” or a “main body frame”) 13, and a lower front plate (also referred to as a “curtain plate” or the like) 14. . Furthermore, a glass door 15 and a dish unit 16 are mounted on the front frame 13. Among these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame used for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 10 to a predetermined position in the island facility in the game hall (game store). As shown in FIG. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the dish unit 16 and the above-described lower front plate 14 have an opening portion whose front side is closed.

  In addition, nailing is generally performed as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility. Then, wood is used as a material of at least a part of the outer frame 12 for fixing to the island facility. Instead of wood, it is possible to employ, for example, a plastic material that can be nail-dried. In addition, as a method for installing the outer frame 12 in the island facility, a method other than nailing can be employed.

  The front frame 13 has a structure having an outer shape that matches the opening of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. The front frame 13 is opened from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 by swinging forward with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. Further, the front frame 13 swings backward from the open state, enters the outer frame 12 and is locked therein, and then becomes the closed state again. And the front frame 13 closes the site | part from the upper short part of the outer frame 12 to the above-mentioned lower front board 14 at the time of closure.

  The locking of the front frame 13 to the outer frame 12 and the release from the outer frame 12 are performed via a lock device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, a cylinder portion 17 of the locking device is disposed in a lower portion of the front frame 13 on the free end side, and this cylinder portion 17 covers the lower portion of the front frame 13. The keyhole is directed forward of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through the aforementioned dish unit 16. Then, when the game shop clerk inserts the key into the key hole of the 17 parts of the cylinder and rotates this key, for example, counterclockwise, the free end side of the front frame 13 is released from the lock device, and the front frame 13 is in the open state. Become.

  With respect to such a front frame 13, the lower front plate 14 described above does not have a configuration for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

  The glass door 15 disposed at the front portion of the front frame 13 and the dish unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Furthermore, both the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 can swing independently with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. Then, the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 are brought into an open state by, for example, a game shop clerk swinging horizontally forward and swinging backward from the open state to be locked to the front frame 13. It will be in a closed state.

  The locking of the glass door 15 to the front frame 13 and the release from the front frame 13 are performed via the aforementioned locking device (not shown). That is, when a game shop clerk inserts a key into the key hole of the above-described cylinder 17 and turns this key, for example, in the clockwise direction opposite to when the front frame 13 is opened, the free end side of the glass door 15 is locked. The glass door 15 is opened. Then, the glass door 15 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13, and the glass door 15 is pushed so as to be parallel to the front frame 13. Lock to the frame 13.

  Further, by opening the glass door 15, a locking mechanism (not shown) of the tray unit 16 appears and can be operated, and an operation part (not shown) of this locking mechanism can be operated by a game shop clerk in a downward direction, for example. By performing the pushing operation, the dish unit 16 is opened. Further, the dish unit 16 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13 and the dish unit 16 is pushed so as to be parallel to the front frame 13. Lock to the front frame 13.

  Further, the glass door 15 holds, for example, two parallel transparent plates so as to be detachable. When the glass door 15 is in a closed state, the gaming board 50 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through these transparent plates. I am doing so. As the transparent plate, in addition to a glass plate, a transparent resin plate or the like can be used. Further, by opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held on the front frame 13 by the game board holding mechanism (not shown) is exposed. Further, although not shown, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage for guiding and collecting game balls as game media.

  The dish unit 16 has an upper ball dish 18, a lower ball dish 19, a firing handle 20, and the like on the front surface thereof. Among these, the upper ball tray 18 stores the game balls, supplies the game balls to the launching device 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated via the launch handle 20, and plays the games to the lower ball tray 19. Mechanisms for various functions such as ball discharge are provided. The lower ball tray 19 stores game balls, receives game balls sent from the upper ball tray 18, and stores game balls in a ball box (so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. Mechanisms for various functions such as discharge are provided. In some cases, the ball box is integrally provided in the island facility.

  In this embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided in the upper corner of the glass door 15, the lower front plate 14, and the like, and through these speakers 21, depending on the gaming state, the production pattern, and the like. BGM and various sound effects are output.

  Furthermore, an operation button 22 that can be operated by the player is provided at a portion of the upper ball tray 18 facing the player. The operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper part of the upper ball dish 18 and is located near the center of the upper ball dish 18 in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the operation button 22 includes an operation button light emitter (not shown) inside, and performs light output according to the effect pattern to be executed.

  Note that the operation button 22 may be protruded upward in a predetermined case using a drive source such as a motor. Although not shown in detail in the present embodiment, the operation button 22 in this embodiment is displaced to a mode in which the tip of the operation button 22 protrudes upward by driving the lifting motor, and forms an operation lever input portion that can perform input by tilting. It is possible and has a half-moon shaped eccentric cam for generating vibration in the drive system of the operating lever.

  As shown in FIG. 21, a cross key 96 is provided in addition to the operation buttons 22, and various environment settings can be made by the player using the cross key 96. The contents of the environment setting can be exemplified by volume adjustment of the speaker 21, brightness adjustment or light amount adjustment of an effect display described later, or change of an effect mode described later. Further, for example, the front frame 13 or the like of the gaming machine frame 11 can be provided with a display capable of performing an effect related to the game and a display related to the environment setting described above.

Further, in addition to the cross key, for example, a lever-shaped operation means, various types of touch panels, or the like can be used. In FIG. 21, reference numeral 97 denotes a ball lending button, and reference numeral 98 denotes a return button. Further, reference numeral 98 in FIG. 21 denotes a ball removal button for the upper ball tray 18.
<Back view of pachinko machine>

  Next, a basic configuration on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, a set base (also referred to as “back set board” or the like) 31 that is provided with a game ball passage for guiding or collecting game balls on the back surface of the front frame 13 and serves as a prize ball path formation mechanism. Is attached below the set base 31, a power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the entire gaming machine, and a payout control (also referred to as “prize ball control” etc.) board for controlling the gaming machine frame side. 103 are attached in a state of being accommodated in their respective transparent cases. On the back side of the game board 50, a main board (main control board) 102 that performs overall control of the entire game and a sub board 104 that executes effect control based on control commands from the main board 102 are respectively dedicated. It is housed in a transparent case and provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the opening of the set base 31. Further, the set base 31 includes a launching device 43 and a launch control board 105 that controls the launching device 43.

  In the set base 31, a prize ball tank 33 is provided above the opening. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls which are supplied from the island facility and become prize balls. Further, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided. The prize ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the prize ball discharge passage 36 are arranged along the right side from the upper side of the game board 50 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. Has been.

  The above-mentioned prize ball passage 34 guides and guides the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side. Further, the above-mentioned payout unit 35 can communicate with the prize ball passage 34 and discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 downward in units of one ball. Further, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game balls flowing down from the payout unit 35 to the ball bowl (the upper ball dish 18 or the lower ball dish 19) as a prize ball.

  The power supply unit 32 described above is provided at a lower left portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. The power supply unit 32 converts AC power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine and supplies it to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub board 104, and the like. Moreover, the power switch 40 for operating the power supply unit 32 is disposed behind other devices as indicated by a hidden line (broken line) in the lower right part of the drawing. The power switch 40 is installed so as to be turned on when the lower part of the power switch 40 is pushed down and tilted downward so that it does not turn off even if the dropped game ball hits directly.

  The above-described payout control board 103 is disposed at the lower right portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. The payout control board 103 has a payout control function for controlling the payout unit 35 in accordance with a command relating to payout from the main board 102 and a loan request from the outside. In addition, the above-described launch control board 105 has a launch control function for controlling the launch device 43 so as to launch a game ball (hit ball) into the game area with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1). ing.

  The above-mentioned main board 102 is arranged at the center lower part on the back side of the game board 50, mainly like various lottery functions, setting change functions, control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub board 104, etc. A central processing function in the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided. The above-described sub-board 104 is disposed at the center upper part on the back side of the game board 50 and mainly has a function for controlling various effects described later.

  For the sub-board 104, a main sub-board (sub-main board 301 in this embodiment) responsible for the main function of effect control, and a sub-sub-board (in this embodiment) specialized for a specific effect function such as image creation. The term “sub-board” encompasses these. In addition, in the lower right part on the back side of the set board 31, an external relay terminal board (such as a “frame relay terminal board”) that relays signals from the main board 102, the payout control board 103, etc. to devices outside the pachinko game machine 10 is provided. 46) is also provided.

The setting change function in the main board 102 described above is a function that can change a setting value that defines the theoretical ease (a player's advantage). In this embodiment, six types of integer values “1” to “6” are provided as set values. For each of these set values, probability values related to theoretical big hits and small hits, and The payout rate is different. Such a change in the set value and a jackpot probability for each set value will be described later.
<Board configuration of game board>

  Next, the game board 50 described above and components (board surface parts) arranged on the board surface of the game board 50 will be described. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of a transparent resin material (for example, transparent acrylic resin) or wood (plywood). The game board 50 is formed in a plate shape, and has a game ball passage for guiding the game ball to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The gaming board 50 is attached to the front frame 13 of the gaming machine frame 11 with the board surface on which various board surface parts are mounted facing forward, and is closed by the glass door 15 in a closed state. The front is covered. Further, on the front side of the game board 50, a game area 52 is defined by combining an inner rail and an outer rail formed in a curved belt shape.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the game area 52 includes a first start winning port 62 and a second starting winning port 63, a large winning port device 90 (attacker unit), an operation port 68, a plurality of general winning ports 72, and An out port (58), etc., which is arranged at the bottom of the game area 52 and is hidden behind the operation button 22 in FIG. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 composed of a liquid crystal display device capable of performing display for effects, a center ornament 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

The game area 52 is provided with a number of game nails, windmills, and the like (not shown). It is also possible not to provide a windmill. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the game board 50 at the lower left of the game area 52. A specific configuration and function of the main control display device 53 will be described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned board surface structure of the game board 50 can differ variously according to the game property etc. which were employ | adopted for the pachinko game machine 10, for example.
<Functions of panel parts>

  Next, specific functions and configurations related to the individual panel parts described above will be described. First, the first start winning opening 62 is a start winning opening relating to the first game, and is of a type that always opens the entrance of the game ball and does not change the size of the entrance of the game ball. Further, the first start winning opening 62 has a first start winning detection device 74 (sensor) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start winning opening 62, and the output signal of this sensor is the same as that described above. The main board 102 is input.

  The aforementioned second start winning opening 63 is a starting winning opening relating to the second game, and is arranged on the right side of the first starting winning opening 62. The second start winning port 63 is a start port related to a normal electric accessory (so-called “electric tulip” or “electric chew”), and when a normal symbol to be described later is stopped and displayed in a winning manner, A blade (opening / closing blade) that opens is provided on the right side in FIG. Then, the second start winning opening 63 is expanded by opening and closing the opening and closing blades for a predetermined time based on the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening 63. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the ordinary electric combination is not provided at the start port related to the second game, or the normal electric combination is arranged at the start port related to the first game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second start winning opening 63 includes a second start winning detection device 75 (sensor) and a normal electric accessory solenoid 76 for opening and closing the above-described opening and closing blades. . The output signal of the second start winning detection device 75 is input to the main board 102.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as modes in which the second start winning opening 63 is opened. These opening modes include a relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as “short opening” or “short opening”), or a relatively long time (for example, about 5 seconds). There are modes (referred to as “long open”, “long open”, etc.). It is also possible to provide a middle opening mode set at the opening time between short opening and long opening.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the aforementioned general winning opening 72 includes a general winning detecting device 73 (sensor) for detecting the entering of a game ball. The output signal of the general winning detection device 73 is input to the main board 102.

  When the general winning detection device 73 is shared by the plurality of general winning ports 72, the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning ports 72 are gathered at the place where the general winning detection device 73 is arranged and detected. Is possible. It is also possible to group the plurality of general winning openings 72 for each positional relationship or for each number of prize balls (common winning detection device 73 is shared).

  The aforementioned big prize opening device 90 is formed in a case shape by combining parts made of transparent synthetic resin, and although not shown in the figure, a big prize opening that can be visually recognized by the player is provided inside. . The special winning opening has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and includes an opening / closing door 91 (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 1) for opening and closing the opening. The special winning opening performs an opening operation in a predetermined manner when a predetermined hit occurs. Here, in this embodiment, the special winning opening is opened upward, and the open / close door 91 can slide in the front-rear direction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the special winning opening device 90 includes a special winning detection device 78 for detecting the entrance of a game ball and a special winning opening (opening) solenoid for driving the opening / closing door 91 to open and close. 80. Among these, the big prize detection device 78 has a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the big prize opening device 90, and its output signal is inputted to the main board 102.

  Various devices can be adopted as the special prize opening device 90. For example, as the big prize opening device 90, it is possible to employ a thing that opens the big prize opening forward or an upward opening. Further, as the special winning opening device 90, a plurality of types of operation patterns (opening / closing patterns) related to the above-described opening and closing door 91 for opening and closing the special winning opening are provided, and a plurality of different operation patterns are provided during the big hit game in which the special game is executed. It is possible to employ a device that operates the door 91. Further, as the big prize opening device 90, it is possible to employ a device that has a plurality of big prize openings and distributes game balls to each big prize opening according to the game situation.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the aforementioned operation port 68 includes a passage detection device 69, and this passage detection device 69 has a sensor that detects the passage of a game ball at the operation port 68. An output signal of the sensor in the passage detection device 69 is input to the main board 102, and the passage detection device 69 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence / absence of a ball.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the aforementioned out port 58 includes an out ball detecting device (out port sensor) 82. The out port sensor 82 detects a game ball (out ball) that has entered the out port 58 instead of being a winning ball (safe ball) in the game area 52. Then, the detection result of the out mouth sensor 82 is used for counting out balls or displaying (base display) on a performance display unit (a ball entry state indicator 808 in FIG. 5 to be described later). Yes.

  The center decoration 64 has a production function and the like, and an LED substrate on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided inside the center decoration 64. Then, by driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED is transmitted through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs light decoration (light effect). Further, the light decoration on the center decoration 64 is performed not only during the game but also during the waiting for the start of the game or during the game preparation for the player to adjust the light amount (light amount setting) or the like. Details regarding these will be described later.

  In addition, a plurality of movable effect members are provided on the back surface (inner side) of the center ornament 64, and these movable effect members constitute a gimmick for effects. These movable effect members are usually hidden inside the center decoration 64 as shown in FIG. However, when a predetermined effect is performed, these movable effect members appear in front of the effect display device 60 although illustration is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, light decoration (light effect) is also performed on the movable effect member. Furthermore, the light decoration on the movable effect member is performed not only during the game, but also during the waiting for the start of the game, or during the game preparation for the player to adjust the light amount.

  Further, a game ball passage portion 65 is formed in the right part of the center decoration 64 when viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 has a function of the flow path of the game ball in addition to the above-described effect function. Have.

  The center decoration 64 is provided with a light guide plate 88. As the light guide plate 88, although not shown, it is possible to adopt, for example, a plate provided with two transparent plates arranged in parallel with the plate surfaces facing forward and backward. Furthermore, the light guide plate 88 is attached to the center ornament 64 and shields the outside and the inside of the center ornament 64 in front of the effect display device 60. The light guide plate 88 also functions as a protective cover for the effect display device 60 in the center decoration 64.

  The light guide plate 88 can be configured as follows, for example. That is, inside the center decoration 64, a plurality of LEDs serving as light sources are arranged in a strip shape so as to face one of the left and right end faces of the transparent plate, for example. In normal times, the display content of the effect display device 60 is transmitted to the outside of the transparent plate so that the player can visually recognize the image without overlapping another image on the screen of the effect display device 60.

  However, fine irregularities are formed inside each transparent plate constituting the light guide plate 88 so as not to be visible under normal circumstances. Then, when executing a predetermined effect, for example, the above-described light source facing the end face of one of the transparent plates is driven, and light from the light source is emitted from the end face of the transparent plate toward the inside of the transparent plate. The Further, the light is diffused by the unevenness of the transparent plate irradiated with the light, and a predetermined illustration or the like is colored and emerges by the diffused light so as to be recognized by the player.

  Further, of the two transparent plates of the light guide plate 88, the other transparent plate is engraved with unevenness for forming an image different from the above-described illustration or the like. Then, by driving the light source facing the end face during a predetermined performance, illustrations and the like different from those described above emerge so that the player can recognize them.

  Here, not only one of the left and right end surfaces of the transparent plate, but also one of the upper and lower end surfaces can face the light source, and other illustrations and the like can be projected by the light from the light source. In this way, it is possible to display two types of images per transparent plate. Further, the number of transparent plates may be one or three or more. Further, a transmissive liquid crystal display body can be used instead of or in combination with the light guide plate 88.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the main control display device 53 includes a symbol display board (main symbol display board) 256 in which a large number of LED indicator lamps are arranged. The symbol display board 256 has a normal symbol display unit 59 for displaying the above-described normal symbols, a first special symbol display unit 70 for displaying a first special symbol (described later) corresponding to the first game, and a second game. A second special symbol display unit 71 for displaying a second special symbol (to be described later) and other various display units are formed so as to be visible to the player from the front of the gaming machine. The normal symbol display unit 59 described above constitutes a normal symbol display device. Moreover, the 1st special symbol display part 70 comprises the 1st special symbol display apparatus, and the 2nd special symbol display part 71 comprises the 2nd special symbol display apparatus.

  In the following, the normal symbol is “normal”, the special symbol is “special”, the first special symbol is “first special”, “special” 1, “special”, and the second special symbol is “special”. It may be referred to as “second special figure”, “special figure 2”, “special 2”, or the like. Further, the first special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol 1” or “symbol 1”, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol 2” or “symbol 2”.

The above-mentioned main control display device 53 means that provided in the game board 50, but as described later, a setting display section provided on the main board 102 (setting in FIG. 5A described later). A main control display device including a display 807) and a performance display unit (a ball entry state display 808 in FIG. 5A to be described later) can be used. In this case, the setting display unit and the performance display unit provided on the main board 102 can be referred to as “main board side main control display device”, for example.
<Basic game procedure>

  Then, the game procedure in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, in a situation where a game ball is supplied to the upper ball tray 18, when the player operates and turns the launch handle 20, the upper ball tray 18 has a strength according to the rotation angle. The game balls stored in are fired one by one at predetermined intervals. The game balls are guided by the inner rail and the outer rail described above, reach the upper part of the game area 52, and are discharged to the game area 52 from between the inner rail and the outer rail.

  In a normal game, the player launches so that the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 52, and aims at the first start winning opening 62 located at the lower center of the game area 52. Such a mode of launching mainly using the left side of the game area 52 is called left-handed. In addition, while the player operates the launch handle 20, the launch of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined time interval (for example, an interval not exceeding 100 shots per minute) by the launch device 43 described above. Then, the game ball continuously released to the game area 52 falls in a direction according to factors such as speed and incident angle (or reflection angle) while interfering with a plurality of game nails and windmills.

  When the game ball falls into various winning ports such as the general winning port 72 and the first start winning port 62 described above, the ball is detected and the payout control of the game ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball tray 18 as prize balls via the above-described payout unit 35 according to the type of the winning opening entered. In addition, when the upper ball tray 18 is filled with many game balls and the subsequent game balls that have been paid out cannot enter the upper ball tray 18, these game balls are guided to the lower ball tray 19 as overflow balls. .

  In addition, the game balls dropped into various winning holes become safe balls and are guided from the front side to the back side of the game board 50. In addition, the game ball that has not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52, falls into the out port (58), and is guided to the back side of the game board 50. Then, the game ball that has reached the back side of the game board 50 is guided downward through a predetermined guide rod or game ball passage in the set base 31, and from the pachinko game machine 10 toward the above-mentioned island facility side. Discharged.

  The aforementioned operation port 68 is a gate through which a game ball passes, unlike the above-described prize winning port that generates a safe ball. In the following description, the winning opening including the operation opening 68 is referred to as “winning opening”, and the terms “incoming”, “entering ball”, and “winning” in this embodiment include the meaning of “passing” related to the gate.

  When a game ball enters the operation port 68, a normal symbol (described later) is displayed on the main control display device 53 if a predetermined variation start condition (ordinary variation start condition) as described later is satisfied. Fluctuation is displayed. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display unit 53 indicates the result of random number lottery (ordinary drawing lottery) executed based on the entrance to the operation port 68, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time. Is done.

  When a game ball enters a starting port (here, the first starting winning port 62 or the second starting winning port 63), a predetermined variation start condition (special figure variation start condition) as will be described later is satisfied. For example, a special symbol (described later) is variably displayed on the main control display device 53. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 shows the result of random number lottery (big hit lottery) executed based on the entrance to the starting port, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time. .

  In the above-described effect display device 60, effect display related to the special symbol is performed. This effect display is different depending on whether the special symbol is variably displayed or stopped, and whether the special symbol's stop display mode is a big hit or off. In relation to this, the production of various aspects determined in advance is performed.

  In a big hit game in which a special game is executed, a unit game in which the big prize opening device 90 is activated and the big prize opening (not shown) is opened is repeated a plurality of times. Furthermore, there are special games in which a unit game is repeated a maximum number of times, and a unit game is repeated a number of times less than the maximum number of times. Examples of the maximum number of times include 15 times (15R (round)), and examples of the number of times smaller than the maximum number of times include 5 times (5R). Note that a special game in which a unit game in which a special winning opening is performed only once is referred to as “small hit”.

  In each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is detected at the corresponding big prize opening, or when the total opening time reaches a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds), The termination condition is met and the big prize opening is closed. As the end condition of the unit game, the total opening time indicates that the upper limit value is set even when the opening of a large number of big winnings is divided and performed in one unit game. ing. In order to increase the game playability during the big hit, such as increasing the technical intervention by performing multiple opening of the big prize opening in the unit game, and easily gaining a lottery by performing one open, The opening mode of the big prize opening can be selected from preset patterns.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, a game characteristic in which a plurality of (here, two) games corresponding to the conventional first type pachinko gaming machine are mixed is employed. That is, in the present embodiment, the plurality of games described above can be divided into a first game in which the first start winning opening 62 is used and a second game in which the second start winning opening 63 is used. In the situation where the second game has priority over the first game, and at the same time the game start condition is satisfied, the second game is executed with priority, and the first game is put on hold. The first game and the second game are not executed simultaneously.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the specific game may be executed after the special game is ended, depending on the result of the big hit lottery. This specific game is in a mode different from the above-mentioned special game and is in a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In the present embodiment, a probability variation game (hereinafter referred to as “probability variation”), a variation time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as “time reduction”), and an easy-to-enter game are provided as specific games. As the specific game, there is a game that executes only one of probability change, time saving, and easy-to-enter game, and a game that performs a plurality of specific games at the same time.

  When the specific game is executed, a notification regarding the launch position and launch timing of the game ball recommended by an image or sound of the effect display device 60 (for example, an effect that prompts the player to make a right strike) is executed. Then, when the player increases the amount of rotation of the launch handle 20 clockwise to increase the firing force and launches the game ball toward the area on the right side of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center ornament 64 is Then, it enters the game ball passage portion 65 of the center decoration 64 and flows down the center decoration 64. Further, the game ball released from the center ornament 64 falls in a direction according to the way of hitting while hitting a plurality of game nails and other structures.

  A part of the large number of game balls released from the center decoration 64 passes through the operation port 68 (see FIG. 1) and is detected by the passage detection device 69 (see FIG. 3). Then, as described above, when the game ball passes through the operating port 68, the above-mentioned normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7), and the normal symbol variation display is stopped in a predetermined hit state. Then, the ordinary electric accessory at the second start winning opening 63 is expanded for a predetermined time according to the hit mode.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball reaching the right side of the game area 52 can be guided to the vicinity of the second start winning opening 63 and the big winning opening device 90 by a nail or the like. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the easy-to-enter game is added when the time is a specific game, and during the short-time, the opening of the ordinary electric character is extended by the easy-to-enter game, The combination of the change in the probability of the object and the time reduction of the ordinary electric accessory is performed, and the above-described long opening of the ordinary electric accessory is easily performed. In the short time, one or a plurality of game balls can enter the second start winning opening 63 when the ordinary electric accessory of the second starting winning opening 63 is expanded once. ing.

When a big hit occurs and a special game is executed, the big prize opening (not shown) of the big prize opening device 90 is opened. During this special game, the player is right-handed. Is possible. In this case, before starting the special game, it is conceivable to execute an effect that prompts the player to make a right strike using an image or sound of the effect display device 60.
<Example of jackpot type: ST>

  Next, the types of jackpots in the first game and the second game described above will be described. First, as a big hit, a big hit that repeats the aforementioned unit game 15 times (hereinafter also referred to as “15R big hit” as appropriate) and a big hit that repeats a unit game seven times (hereinafter also referred to as “7R big hit” as appropriate) are provided. . These jackpot lottery modes will be described later.

  The above-mentioned unit game is started in special games when the special prize opening device 90 is opened in the special prize game, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10 The game ends when more than one game ball is dropped and closes the grand prize opening. A special game that repeats such a unit game is based on a game with a so-called ball-out (sometimes referred to as a ball-out) for the purpose of allowing a player to acquire a game ball. Further, among the various big hits, the 15R big hit and the 7R big hit are intended to cause the player to acquire a relatively large number of game balls.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as one kind of big hit, it is possible to provide, for example, a portion that does not change reliably (15R normal or 7R normal) in 15R big hit or a part of 15R big hit. In addition, for example, even if it is 15R big hit, the opening period of the big prize opening is short, and it is possible to acquire only the same number of balls as the 5R big hit (15R probability variation (actual 5R)), 5R big hit Even in such a case, it is possible to provide a thing in which it is almost impossible to obtain a ball (for example, only a minimum degree (for example, one ball) can be entered into the big prize opening device 90 in each R).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific gaming state such as the above-mentioned probability change and time reduction occurs for a specific jackpot determined in advance. As a mode of occurrence of such a specific game state, for example, it is possible to provide a big hit that does not give at least one of the privilege functions such as probability change, time saving, and easy entry game. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit with only a probability change or a big hit with only a short time. Furthermore, the type of jackpot can be made different depending on the difference in the duration of probability change or the difference in duration of the shorter time. Further, when the electric chew support is executed during the short time, the “short duration duration” can be rephrased as “the duration of the electric chew support”. Furthermore, it is also conceivable that only the electric Chu support is executed out of the time reduction and the electric Chu support.

However, the combination of the big hit, the probability change, the time reduction, etc. is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various combinations can be employed. For example, the probability change may occur for all jackpots. In this case, all of the 15R big hits in this embodiment are 15R big hits with a certain probability change (15R positive variation), and all the 7R big hits are a 7R big hit with a certain probability change (7R accurate variation).
<Hits other than jackpot>

In this embodiment, small hits are provided as types of hits other than big hits. In the first game (or the second game), when this small hit occurs, the special prize opening device 90 is opened once, for example. The small lottery mode will be described later.
<Main control display device>
<< Configuration of main control display device >>

  Next, the main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control display device 53 on the gaming board side arranges a large number (36 in this case) of LED indicator lights in two rows (upper and lower) on the symbol display board 256. It is configured. In this embodiment, the number of LED indicator lamps in the upper and lower stages is 18, and the LED indicator lights in each stage are arranged at equal intervals in the horizontal direction. Further, the intervals between the LED indicator lamps in the vertical relationship are also constant for all 18 lamps.

  In the main control display 53, the 10 LED indicators at the right end in the upper stage when viewed from the front are used for information display according to FIG. 1, and the 10 LED indicators at the right end in the lower stage are shown in FIG. It is used for such information display. In the upper and lower stages, the two rightmost LED indicators constitute a first special symbol storage display unit 83 and a second special symbol storage display unit 84 indicating the number of reserved memories. The eight LED indicator lamps arranged on the left of the first special symbol memory display unit 83 constitute the first special symbol display unit 70 described above, and 8 arranged on the left of the second special symbol memory display unit 84. Each LED indicator lamp constitutes the second special symbol display section 71 described above.

  The 1st special symbol display part 70 can perform change display and stop display of the 1st special symbol concerning the 1st game by the operation mode of eight LED indicator lights arranged in a line in the horizontal direction. The first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 70 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 62, and its variation display is predetermined. When the game is stopped in the winning mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. In addition, the first special symbol display unit 70 displays a maximum of 255 (= 2 ^ 8) when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, by combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED indicator lamp. -1) The type of identification information can be displayed.

  Similarly for the second special symbol display unit 71 described above, a maximum of 255 (= 2 at the time of stop display of the second special symbol due to the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lamps arranged in a line in the horizontal direction. {Circle around (8)} Types of identification information can be displayed.

  Furthermore, in the upper stage, the four LED indicator lamps arranged on the left of the first special symbol display unit 70 are used for displaying information related to the normal symbol (ordinary symbol). The two LED indicator lights arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display unit 70 constitute a normal symbol memory display unit 85 for displaying the number of reserved symbols stored in the normal symbol. The two LED indicator lamps arranged side by side constitute a normal symbol display section 59.

  The normal symbol display unit 59 performs normal symbol variation display and stop display according to the operation mode of the two LED indicator lamps. And the normal symbol display part 59 can display the identification information of 3 (= 2 ^ 2-1) types at the maximum in the case of a stop display.

  In addition, a round number display section 86 is configured by two LED display lamps arranged on the left side of the normal symbol display section 59 in the upper stage and two LED indicator lights located at the lower left end of the lower stage. Further, the four LED indicator lamps between the round number display section 86 and the second special symbol display section 71 in the lower stage are a first state display section (state display lamp 1) 87a and a second state display section in order from the left. (Status indicator lamp 2) 87b, third status indicator (status indicator lamp 3) 87c, and fourth status indicator (status indicator lamp 4) 87d.

  The first state display unit 87a described above is turned on when the probability variation function according to the special drawing is activated, and the second state display unit 87b is turned on when the probability variation function according to the usual diagram is activated. Yes. The second state display portion 87b is also lit when the open extension is in a so-called electric support (electric chew support) state. Further, the third state display portion 87c is used as a divided (right-handed) state indicator lamp. The fourth state display part 87d is used as an error indicator lamp.

  Here, the above-mentioned third state display part 87c (battering state indicator lamp) is lit not only during the electric support state but also during a big hit. During a big hit, even if it is during a retreat, a flag (electric support flag) or the like for setting the power support state is off. Further, the third state display portion 87c is also lit when, for example, a long opening relating to the ordinary electric accessory in other states (normal time).

The main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) having such a configuration is electrically connected to the main board 102 as shown in FIG. Various display units in the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102. In FIG. 3, only the normal symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 among the various display units in the main control display device 53 are shown.
<< Functions of main control display device >>

  When the game ball passes through the aforementioned operation port 68, the normal symbol display section 59 blinks, and the normal symbol variation display is executed. Then, when a predetermined variation time (ordinary variation time) elapses after the normal symbol variation display is started, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. And, if the normal symbol is displayed in an out-of-phase (out-of-phase) mode, if there is a ball entering the subsequent operating port after the elapse of a predetermined stop time (ordinary stop time), it is normal The next variable display related to the symbol is started. In addition, when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode (a hit mode), the display shifts to the next fluctuation display in the same manner as in the case of losing, while the normal symbol hits and stops first. Depending on the mode, the second start winning opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

  The number of holdings related to the regular symbol lottery is the number of game balls that have passed through the operating port 68 during the variation of the normal symbol, and indicates the number of regular symbol lotteries for which the variation display of the regular symbol has not yet been executed. That is, if the symbol variation performed in the normal symbol memory display unit 85 has not ended, the variation start condition is not satisfied, and when the symbol variation ends, the variation start condition is satisfied, Based on the stored lottery result (holding lottery result), a new symbol variation is started. The upper limit of the number of holds is four, and the hold storage is not performed more than four.

  The display of four types of numerical values by the normal symbol storage display unit 85 is, for example, when both the number of holds is 0 (no hold), both are turned off, and when the number of holds is 1, either one is turned on. It is possible to perform in such a manner that the other is turned off. In addition, when the number of holds is 2, both are lit, when the number of holds is 3, one of them is lit and the other blinks, and when the number of holds is 4, both are blinked. Can be displayed.

  The display of the number of reserved first special symbols by the first special symbol memory display unit 83 is performed by displaying four types of information with two LED indicator lamps as one set. The display of the number of reserved second special symbols by the second special symbol storage display unit 84 is also performed by displaying four types of information with two LED indicator lights as one set.

In addition, when it becomes the game situation which should perform the above-mentioned right strike, the display in the predetermined aspect using the 3rd state display part 86c of the main control display apparatus 53 (refer FIG. 7) is performed. In the present embodiment, the third state display portion 86c is set to turn off when left-handed, which is a game situation to be left-handed, and to light up when right-handed, which is a game situation to be right-handed.
<Configuration and basic display contents of production display device>

  Next, the configuration of the effect display device 60 described above and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, a large-sized (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, other effect displays such as an effect display for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 and a story display are performed. Although various images are displayed on the effect display device 60, here, basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

  As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the main control display device 53, the effect display device 60 produces an effect as shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b). A variation effect with a variation display of a symbol (also referred to as “decorative symbol” or the like) 190 is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect design 190 includes a left effect design 190a, a middle effect design 190b, and a right effect design 190c. In the following, the left middle right effect symbols 190a to 190c may be referred to as “effect symbols 190” or “effect symbols 190a to 190c” depending on the situation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect design 190 has seven types of element symbols (symbol element effect symbols) having the meanings of the numerals “1” to “7”. Here, in order not to complicate the explanation, the explanation is made using seven kinds of element symbols having the meanings of the numerals “1” to “7”. As the element symbols, for example, a predetermined word or the like is used. It is also possible to adopt symbols with meanings other than numbers. Furthermore, it is also possible to use both elements having numerical meanings and elements having other meanings as element designs. In addition, in order to execute a special effect (a pseudo-continuous notice or a special zone effect, which will be described later), an effect suggestion that appears only at a certain time of change (displayed by adding or replacing a normal symbol) is performed. The special symbol for this is also included in the production symbol 190 in a broad sense.

  With the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8A). In the present embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbols is such that the left effect symbols 190a to the right effect symbols 190c are individually moved in the vertical direction (vertical scrolling), and the above-described element symbols are made to appear in the display area 194 sequentially. It is executed by. In addition, as a scroll direction of the effect symbols 190a to 190c, various modes such as a horizontal direction, rotation, or turning can be employed in addition to the vertical direction.

  Further, the effect symbol 190 may constitute a so-called “reach” combination as an intermediate stage of variable display. In this “reach”, two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) are, for example, “7” and “7” having the same number of symbols, the same meaning, Alternatively, the combination is configured with symbols having a predetermined relationship. Furthermore, in this “reach”, the remaining one symbol (in this case, the middle effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the reach combination is in a variation state that cannot be combined with other effect symbols. It has become.

  Note that various types of “reach” and other various types can be adopted as the display mode of the effect design 190, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects are performed in addition to the effects by the effect symbol 190, and details thereof will be described later.

  In this embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be a thing. Furthermore, the effect display device 60 is not limited to the one provided with only one display body, and for example, an additional display body may be added and configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member and configure a gimmick with the additional display body. Normally, an additional display body is arranged outside the display area 194 so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, it is conceivable that an additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.
<Configuration related to setting change function>

  Next, a configuration related to the above-described setting change and a method for changing the setting will be described. FIG. 5A shows a partially enlarged state in which the main substrate 102 is accommodated in a transparent substrate case 801, and FIG. 5B shows a cross section taken along the line AA in FIG. Enlarged and schematically shown. In FIG. 5A, the substrate case 801 is formed in a box shape of a divided structure (for example, a two-divided structure) from a colorless and transparent plastic material.

  As a divided structure of the substrate case 801, for example, a structure in which a cover body is combined with a substrate holding body that holds the main substrate 102, and the substrate holding body and the cover body are coupled via a caulking structure that leaves a trace during separation. Can be adopted. In the substrate case 801, a connector 802 (partially indicated by a reference numeral) used for connection with another device such as the sub main substrate 301 is formed with a size that does not cause a gap as much as possible. It is exposed from the opened opening.

  The main board 102 is visible through the transparent board case 801. In FIG. 5A, the CPU (main CPU) 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the setting display 807 described above, The ball status indicator 808 is indicated by a broken line, and the other devices are not shown. Among these, the test terminal mounting area 806 is an area where test terminals are mounted only when a ball test or the like is performed at the product test stage, and the test terminals are mounted on the main board 102 at the mass production stage. Not.

  The setting display 807 described above displays the selected setting value only when the setting is changed or when the setting is confirmed. And the setting indicator 807 is the current setting regarding the set value for differentiating the operation probability of the accessory continuous operation device (the operation probability of the device that continuously operates the special electric accessory, so-called jackpot probability). The value can be displayed. Further, a 7-segment display for one digit is used for the setting display 807. Here, in this embodiment, although not shown, a dot display section is provided in the lower right corner of the 7-segment display in the setting display 807.

  A setting key cylinder (also referred to as “setting key switch”) 809 and a setting change button (also referred to as “setting change switch”) 810 are arranged in the vicinity of the setting indicator 807. A setting change operation unit 811 is configured by the change button 810 and the like. As shown in FIG. 5B, the setting change operation unit 811 opens the setting change opening / closing lid (hereinafter referred to as “opening / closing lid”) 812 of the substrate case 801, so that FIG. As shown, it is exposed.

  The opening / closing lid 812 is formed integrally with the substrate case 801 via a resin hinge, for example, and is pulled out by pulling the protruding knob portion 813 with fingers to resist the elastic force and to be opened as indicated by an arrow B. Can be illustrated. Further, when closing the opening / closing lid 812, it is laid down from the state of FIG. 5B (not shown), and the free end side is locked to the substrate case 801.

  The above-mentioned entry state indicator 808 is used as a performance display unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and can display a base for each gaming state (value of award balls per number of shots). In this embodiment, a 7-segment display for four digits is used for the ball entry status indicator 808 as shown by a solid line in the lower right part of FIG. 5A. Further, a dot display section (reference numeral omitted) is provided at the lower right corner of the 7-segment display of each digit of the ball entry status display 808.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the CPU 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the entry state indicator 808, the setting change operation unit 811, and the setting indicator 807 are wrapped in a plan view (a rear view of the gaming machine). It is arranged so as not to overlap (do not overlap). In addition, the ball entry status indicator 808 and the setting indicator 807 are arranged at an interval of a predetermined distance or more (for example, 30 mm or more) so that display misidentification can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the left side in FIG. 5B is a free end when the gaming machine frame 11 is opened, and the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 are arranged near the free end side. Thus, while considering that the setting value changing operation can be easily performed, the entry state indicator 808 is arranged on the rotating shaft (fixed end) side when the gaming machine frame 11 is opened. Consideration is given to prevent display information from being unintentionally viewed by the player when the gaming machine frame is opened. Of course, when priority is given to preventing fraud when setting values are changed, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting indicator 807 are formed on the right side of the main board 102 as viewed from the front (the rotation axis side of the gaming machine frame 11). That's fine.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the above-described points, an opening / closing lid 812 is provided in a portion corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811 so that the setting change operation unit 811 cannot be easily accessed. The setting change operation unit 811 is configured not to be exposed except in the case of changing work, setting information checking work, and the like. Hereinafter, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the setting key (key) can be inserted into the setting key insertion port (reference number omitted) of the setting key cylinder 809 in the upper surface portion of the substrate case 801 in the positional relationship corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811. In addition, an opening 816 having a predetermined size is formed so that the setting change button 810 can be operated. However, by forming a partition wall such as a side wall from the opening 816 toward the upper surface of the main board 102, other electronic components (for example, the CPU 501) cannot be accessed via the opening 816. It has become. In addition, a setting key cylinder 809 having a setting key insertion port (reference number omitted) corresponding to the opening 816 and a push type setting change button 810 are vertically viewed from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Further, an opening / closing lid 812 corresponding to the size of the opening 816 is provided in the substrate case 801 so as to be openable and closable in a state where the opening / closing lid 812 is always biased in a direction to close the opening 816.

  Next, an outline of the operation method of setting change and the operation of setting change / setting display will be briefly described. When confirming the set value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the opening / closing lid 812 is opened at a predetermined angle against the urging force, and the setting key cylinder 809 is opened. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key slot and rotate the key to the right. Then, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again without pressing the initialization switch 544 to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, a corresponding numerical value if the setting value range is “1” to “6”) is displayed on the setting display 807 formed by the 7-segment LED, and the setting display mode is used. In order to show that there is a certain segment (here, the dot portion) is lit. In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is activated (for example, in a state where control based on input related to the progress of the game, such as detection of a winning at the start prize opening, can be executed), the setting value changing process It is configured not to be able to.

  On the other hand, when changing the set value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the open / close lid 812 is opened at a predetermined angle against the urging force, and the set key is pressed. A setting key (key) is inserted into the setting key insertion port of the cylinder 809 and the key is rotated rightward. Then, while pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. As a result of this operation, the current setting value blinks on the setting display 807 formed by the 7-segment LED, and a part of the segments (here, the dot portion) are turned off to indicate the setting change mode. Is displayed.

  In this state, each time the setting change button 810 is pressed, a new setting value incremented by 1 from the current setting value is temporarily stored, and the stored setting value is displayed on the setting display 807. The manager in the game hall operates the setting change button 810 so that an arbitrary (target) setting value is obtained. In this embodiment, if the set value at power-on is “1”, “1” “2”... “5” “6” “1” each time the setting change button 810 is pressed once. To be changed.

Then, when the key inserted in the setting key cylinder 809 is rotated to the left in a state where the setting is changed to an arbitrary setting value (an arbitrary setting value is displayed on the setting display 807) by operating the setting change button, After the change process is completed, the set value is displayed on the setting display 807 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) and a part of the segments (here, the dot portion) is lit. And both dots are turned off.
<Configuration and basic display contents of production display device>

  Next, the configuration of the effect display device 60 described above and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, a large-sized (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, other effect displays such as an effect display for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 and a story display are performed. Although various images are displayed on the effect display device 60, here, basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

  As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the main control display device 53, the effect display device 60 produces an effect as shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b). Variation display of a symbol (also referred to as a decorative symbol) 190 is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect design 190 includes a left effect design 190a, a middle effect design 190b, and a right effect design 190c.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the left effect design 190a has nine types of element designs (symbol element effect designs) having the meanings of the symbols “1” to “9”. Further, the medium effect symbol 190b and the right effect symbol 190c, which are other effect symbols, also have nine types of element symbols that mean the numbers “1” to “9”, like the left effect symbol 190a. Details of the above-described element design will be described later.

  With the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8A). In the present embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbols is such that the left effect symbols 190a to the right effect symbols 190c are individually moved in the vertical direction (vertical scrolling), and the above-described element symbols are made to appear in the display area 194 sequentially. It is executed by.

  Further, the effect symbol 190 may constitute a so-called “reach” combination as an intermediate stage of variable display. In this “reach”, two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) are, for example, “7” and “7” having the same number of symbols, the same meaning, Alternatively, the combination is configured with symbols having a predetermined relationship. Furthermore, in this “reach”, the remaining one symbol (in this case, the middle effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the reach combination is in a variation state that cannot be combined with other effect symbols. It has become.

  Note that various types of “reach” and other various types can be adopted as the display mode of the effect design 190, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects are performed in addition to the effects by the effect symbol 190, and details thereof will be described later.

  In this embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be a thing. Furthermore, the effect display device 60 is not limited to the one provided with only one display body, and for example, an additional display body may be added and configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member and configure a gimmick with the additional display body. Normally, an additional display body is arranged outside the display area 194 so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, it is conceivable that an additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.
<Electric configuration of pachinko machines>

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. Here, the main components of the electrical configuration are extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 includes a power supply board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub main board 301, and the like. Among these, the power supply board 251 is connected to the above-described payout control board 103, game ball lending device connection terminal board 106, launch control board 107, and the like. The main board 102 is connected to the payout control board 103 via a frame relay terminal board 108. The main board 102 is connected to a main symbol display board (also referred to as “symbol display board”) 256 constituting the main control display device 53 and a sub main board 301. The sub-sub board 302 described above is connected.

  The power supply board 251 among the various configurations described above is provided in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2). The power board 251 is connected to a frame effect connection board 300 and a gaming ball rental device connection terminal board (not shown), and a gaming ball rental device connection terminal board (not shown) is connected to a ball. A ball operation board or the like used for the operation of the currency is connected.

  A touch switch 310 provided in the firing handle 20 (see FIGS. 1 and 20) is connected to the firing control board 105 described above. Although not shown, the touch switch 310 is connected to a launch touch lever and a grounding lock. The touch switch (also referred to as “touch sensor”) 310 detects the contact and changes the mode of the output signal when a player or a game shop clerk touches the firing handle 20 with a finger (FIG. 20B). Change.

  Furthermore, the launch control board 105 is connected with a launch intensity volume 311, a launch stop switch 312, and the launch device 43 described above. Of these, the firing intensity volume 1311 is used to change the firing intensity of the game ball in accordance with the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 20. The firing stop switch 312 is used for detecting an operation with a part of a finger (such as a thumb) holding the firing handle 20 and stopping the firing.

  The main board 102 is supplied with power from the power supply board 251 via the payout control board 103 and the frame relay terminal board. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the main board 102 is connected to the main control display device 53, the passage detection devices 69a and 69b, and the ordinary electric role through a game board connection board and a game board relay terminal board (not shown). Object solenoid 76, first start prize detection device 74, second start prize detection device 75, general prize detection device 73, big prize detection device 78, big prize opening (open) solenoid 80, magnetic sensor and radio wave sensor (illustrated) Abbreviation) etc. are connected. Here, in this embodiment, the first start winning detection device 74 and the second start winning detection device 75 are directly connected to the main board 102 without going through the game board connection board or the game board relay terminal board. Has been done.

  The sub main board 301 is supplied with power from the power supply board 251 via the frame effect connection board 300 and the frame connection board 303. Furthermore, in addition to the frame connection board 303 and the frame effect connection board 300 described above, the sub main board 301 is used for effects in the gaming machine frame 11 via the glass frame effect connection relay board 305 and the glass frame effect connection board 306. Each device is connected.

  Each device for effects in the pachinko gaming machine 10 includes a frame electrical decoration L2 substrate 317, a frame electrical decoration R2 substrate 318, (left) speaker 21 (L), (right) speaker 21 (R), and the like. Further, in this embodiment, a cross key (cross button) board, an effect button board, a lift motor, an effect button (operation button) motor, a button position sensor, and the like are also provided, but these are not shown in FIG. doing.

  In addition, a game board device, an image display device, a sound control device, and the like are also connected to the sub-main board 301. Among these, as a device for the game board, there is a board surface connection board 331. The panel electrical connection board 331 is connected to the sub-main board 301 via the frame connection board 303 and the effect interface board 304 described above. A center electrical decoration board 332 used for electrical decoration of the center decoration 64 is connected to the panel electrical connection board 331. In addition, although not shown in the drawing, an effect sensor substrate, other illumination substrates, an effect motor, and the like are also connected to the panel electrical connection board 331. Here, although not shown, the effect interface board 304 is connected to various electric decoration boards and effect motors.

  The above-described image display device connected to the sub main board 301 includes a sub sub board (image control board) 302. The sub sub board 302 has a liquid crystal unit (also referred to as a liquid crystal module) via an image display connection A board 336. 42) is connected. Here, in this embodiment, although not shown, another liquid crystal unit connected to the effect interface board 304 via the image display connection B board is also provided. Further, as the above-described voice control devices connected to the sub main board 301, there are a voice control board (voice board) 339 and a voice ROM (ROM) board 340.

  Next, the configuration of the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted on the main board 102. Among these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) in which resin packaging is performed can be used. The “ROM” and “RWM” described in this embodiment are comprehensive concepts including both those built in the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

  Further, although not shown, in the CPU device mounted on the main board 102, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a random number clock generation circuit, a random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers, an 8-bit random number Random number circuit and the like. Among these, the random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and the random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers that are built-in random numbers.

  The main board 102 is equipped with an input / output port 505 for inputting / outputting data to / from devices outside the main board 102. Furthermore, although not shown, various circuit portions such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main substrate 102.

  The ROM 502 described above stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform processing related to the game, predetermined control data, and the like. The RWM 503 stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like so that the CPU 501 can execute the game program.

  Subsequently, a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513 are mounted on the payout control board 103. Among these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) in which resin packaging is performed can be used. The ROM 512 stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform a process related to payout, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the RWM 513 described above stores rewritable data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the payout program is executed by the CPU 501.

  The sub-main board 301 includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. . The output side of the main board 102 is connected to the input side of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, ROM 522, work RWM 523, output port 528, and the like are connected to the output side of the input port 527.

  The CPU 521 of the sub main board 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on the effect display command (command) for symbol display transmitted from the main board 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RWM 523 is for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. Memory.

  Note that transmission / reception of data between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 is performed in a one-way communication (one-way communication) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. Since unidirectional communication is ensured between the main board 102 and the sub main board 301, data cannot be transmitted from the sub main board 301 to the main board 102. Therefore, information held by the main board 102 cannot be referred to by the sub main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub main board 301. In order to enable such communication in one direction, for example, a communication restriction unit (buffer circuit or the like) is mounted on the main board 102, and data output to the sub-main board 301 is sent to the communication restriction means. It is possible to do through.

  The sub-sub board 302 includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, an input port 538, an output port 539, and a bus line (not shown). Further, the image controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540. The output side of the sub-main board 301 is connected to the input side of the input port 538, and the devices such as the CPU 531, the work RWM 532, and the program ROM 533 are connected to the output side of the input port 538.

The video memory 540 described above is a memory for storing display data displayed on the effect display device 60, and the display content (frame image) of the effect display device 60 is rewritten by rewriting the content of the image data in the video memory 540. ) Is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timing of each of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Furthermore, the effect is displayed on the effect display device 60 by superimposing the symbols in the order of layers in which priorities are determined in advance.
<Power supply and data backup>

  The power supply board 251 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 10 and an initialization switch circuit unit 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating voltages to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside, and supplies a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, etc. to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, And it supplies with respect to another predetermined | prescribed apparatus.

  The initialization switch circuit unit 543 is an initialization signal for clearing backup data to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the initialization switch 544 is pressed by a game store administrator, for example, when the power is turned on. Is provided. As will be described later, the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 can hold (back up) stored data even when the power supply to the power supply board is cut off. When the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on and the above initialization signal is input to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, the data (backup data) backed up by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 is stored. Cleared. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the state changes to the setting change state according to the input state of the initialization switch 544 and the input state of the setting key when the power is turned on, the main board is The presence / absence of initialization, the range of initialization, and the like can be determined in accordance with a signal from the initialization switch circuit unit 543 and an input signal related to the setting key.

  The initialization switch 544 is divided into one for the main board 102 and one for the payout control board 103, and the backed up data is cleared separately on the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. It may be. Further, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is operated when the power is turned on, the backup data for the main board 102 and a part of the backup data of the payout control board 103 are cleared and added to the payout control board 103. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining backup data on the payout control board 103 is cleared when the payout initialization switch (not shown) is further operated.

  As described above, the RWM 503 in the main board 102 can hold (backup) data by being supplied with the backup voltage from the power board 251 even after the pachinko gaming machine 10 is powered off. That is, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data. This backup area 503a has a stack pointer or the like when the power is cut off when the power is cut off (when a power interruption occurs) due to the occurrence of a power failure (including a so-called instantaneous power failure due to a momentary voltage drop). This is an area for storing values such as registers and I / O. Then, with the normal power-on or power failure cancellation, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before power-off based on the information in the backup area 503a.

  Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by a power-off process (described later), and restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is executed in a power-on process (described later) when the power is turned on. . As the backup area 503a, an RWM (external RWM) externally connected to the CPU 501 and connected to a backup power source can be used.

  In addition, the RWM 513 on the payout control board 103 can also hold (backup) data by supplying a backup voltage from the power board 251 after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off, similarly to the RWM 503 on the main board 102. It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data. This backup area 513a stores values such as a stack pointer, each register, and I / O when the power is cut off when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (when a power interruption occurs). Area. Then, with the normal power-on or power-off, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information in the backup area 513a.

  Writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is cut off by the power-off process in the payout control board 103, and each value written in the backup area 513a is restored when the power is turned on. Control start processing). As the backup area 513a, as in the case of the main board 102, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) externally connected to the CPU 511 and connected to a backup power source.

  The aforementioned main board 102 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 that monitors the power interruption due to the power failure as described above. The power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal (power failure signal) to the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. More specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors the DC stable voltage (for example, 30 volts), which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply board 251, and this voltage becomes less than the predetermined voltage. In the case, the occurrence of a power failure (power cutoff) is detected, and the above-described power interruption signal is output. Based on the input of such a power interruption signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute a predetermined power-off process.

  Note that the electrical characteristics of the main board 102 and the like indicate that the DC stable voltage has a sufficient time for execution of a predetermined process such as a power-off process even after the DC stable voltage becomes lower than a predetermined voltage at which an interruption signal is output. In the meantime, the output of the voltage of 5 volts which is the drive voltage of the control system is maintained at a normal value.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the payout control board 103 via the main board 102 or is separately supplied to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 separately. You may make it do.

  Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 described above can be disposed in a part other than the main board 102. For example, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply substrate 251 and a power interruption signal may be input from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to each substrate on the power supply substrate 251. It is also possible to omit the input of the power interruption signal from the main board 102 to the payout control board 103. Furthermore, the main board 102 may be able to exhibit the function of the power supply board 251. In this case, it is conceivable to form the power supply unit 541 on the main substrate 102.

  Furthermore, a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided on the payout control board 103, and the power supply interruption processing based on the output of the power interruption signal and the power interruption signal may be performed on each of the payout control board 103 and the main board 102. Further, out of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, only the payout control board 103 may be provided with the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 so that the power interruption signal is transmitted from the payout control board 103 to the main board 102.

  The main CPU 501 and the payout CPU 511 described above are provided with an NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminal. In addition, the execution of the power-off process described above includes a hardware type that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on the input of a power-off signal indicating a voltage drop to the NMI terminal of the main CPU, a timer A periodic interrupt process based on the setting includes software-like ones that are performed by checking a power-off flag that is set when a voltage drop is detected.

  In the present embodiment, power-off processing is performed based on hardware triggers by NMI. The signal input to the NMI terminal can be performed, for example, by inputting a power interruption signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal may be generated not only when the power interruption signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 but also due to noise mixed into the signal line connected to the NMI terminal. It should be noted that the shift to the power-off process can be performed based on a software method as will be described later as another embodiment. Further, it is possible to set a power-off flag based on a power-off signal input to the NMI terminal, and to trigger execution of power-off processing. Here, the data backup is performed by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the data backup of the storage area is performed by the sub main board 301. Data backup can be performed in the same manner as the substrate 102 or the payout control substrate 103.

  Next, basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main board 102 according to the present embodiment performs various functions such as a ball entry determination, a lottery, and a command transmission, for example, by the functions of the respective components (see FIG. 4).

  FIG. 6 shows representative functional means in each of the main board 102, the sub main board 301, and the sub sub board 302. Among these, the main board 102 includes the entrance determination means 110, the first lottery means 111, the second lottery means 112, the general drawing lottery means 113, the hold control means 114, the main display control means 115, the special game control means 116, Specific game control means 117, opening / closing control means 118, prior information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120, and the like are provided. Then, the main board 102, by these functional means, as described in order below, lottery concerning special symbols, lottery concerning ordinary symbols, hold control, main control display, special games, specific games, opening / closing control, advance information Execute notifications and so on.

The above-described winning determination means 110 includes sensors provided at each winning opening for entering a game ball into each winning opening (operating opening, various starting winning openings, large winning opening, general winning opening, out opening, etc.). Judgment is made based on the signal output from.
<< Lottery function for special design >>

  The aforementioned first lottery means 111 executes the first lottery based on the ball entering the first start winning opening 62. The first lottery unit 111 has functions of a first lottery value acquisition unit 121, a first winning / failure determining unit 122, a first symbol determining unit 123, and a first pattern determining unit 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display section 70 of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7).

  Similarly, the above-described second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery based on the ball entering the second start winning opening 63. The second lottery means 112 has functions of a second lottery value acquisition means 125, a second winning / failure determining means 126, a second symbol determining means 127, and a second pattern determining means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbol stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display unit 71 of the main control display device 53 described above.

  The first lottery value acquisition means 121 provided in the first lottery means 111 described above, when the ball enters the first start winning opening 62, the value of the big hit random number related to the first lottery is used as the first winning / failing lottery value. Get as. Also, the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the second lottery means 112 described above receives the value of the big hit random number related to the second lottery as the second winning or failing chance when the player enters the second starting prize opening 63. Obtained as a lottery value.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot random number acquired as the first winning / failing lottery value and the jackpot random number acquired as the second winning / failing lottery value are obtained by dividing a hardware random number (hard random number) and a software random number (soft random number). It is generated by the calculation (addition) used. As the hardware random number, for example, a built-in random number generated by a 16-bit random number circuit is used, and as the software random number, a value updated for each interrupt by a random number generation program in software is used. Note that one of hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used.

  The first winning / failing judging means 122 in the first lottery means 111 makes a judgment of winning / notifying based on the first winning / notifying lottery value, and whether or not the first winning / losing lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (winning value) to win. Judging. Similarly, the second winner determination unit 126 in the second lottery unit 112 performs a hit determination based on the above-described second winner / lottery value, and the second winner / lottery value becomes a predetermined value (winning value) that is a hit. Judge whether it is applicable. In the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination unit 122 and the second success / failure determination unit 126, the determination result determination table (for example, FIG. 9 () a)) is used. Here, the normal time big change big hit shown in FIG. 9A is a random value range that is always big hit, and the big change big hit is a random value range that is big hit only at the probability change. It is shown that.

  The first symbol determination means 123 in the first lottery means 111 and the second symbol determination means 127 in the second lottery means 112 are those in the case where either of the big wins is won in the big win lottery related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol The type of special symbol is determined based on the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 10). The jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the symbol lottery value, which is a random value (symbol random number) related to symbol determination, and the type of special symbol.

  Here, the symbol lottery value may also be referred to as “design random number per symbol” or “symbol random number” related to the special symbol. Further, in this embodiment, the winning type includes a small hit, and the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 are special in the case of winning a small hit in the big hit lottery relating to the special symbol. The symbol type is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 10C).

  The symbol lottery value is acquired in response to a ball entering the start winning opening, as in the case of the above-mentioned winning / closure lottery value. In addition, the special symbol type is associated with the winning type, and is associated with the acquired symbol lottery value, so that the type of the big hit or the presence / absence of the small hit is determined.

  The first pattern determining means 124 in the first lottery means 111 and the second pattern determining means 128 in the second lottery means 112, based on the special pattern variation pattern table, the variation pattern of the special symbol in the corresponding special symbol display unit. decide. The special figure variation pattern table defines the relationship between a large number of special figure variation patterns and a pattern lottery value that is a random value (variation pattern random number) for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol.

  The pattern lottery value is acquired in response to a ball entering the start winning opening, similarly to the above-described winning / closure lottery value. Furthermore, the variation patterns related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are, for example, according to various game situations such as a big hit, a loss, a reach, a short time, a hold number, a number of changes after a big hit, etc. A plurality of different special figure variation pattern tables are provided.

  The variation pattern related to the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) defines the time (variation time) from the start of the variation to the stop in the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure fluctuation pattern defines various fluctuation times, for example, from 1 second or less to several tens of seconds depending on the type. That is, each special symbol variation pattern has a variation time as an end condition of variation display. In the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol display unit 71 (see FIG. 7), a special time is displayed. When the symbol variation display is started and the specified variation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  For many of the special figure fluctuation patterns to be selected when the time is short, the fluctuation time is set shorter than that of the special figure fluctuation patterns to be selected when the time is not. However, special figure fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of suspensions is four at non-short hours include those with short fluctuation times compared to specific special figure fluctuation patterns at the time reduction. Yes.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selected in a predetermined situation such as when the probability changes is mostly composed of an extremely short variation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds). In such a situation, a special symbol variation display and an accompanying effect are executed based on a variation pattern of a very short time.
<< Relationship between random numbers for special designs and set values >>

  Subsequently, the relationship between the random number for the special symbol and the set value will be described. FIG. 9A shows the pass / fail random number for the set value “1” among the set values “1” to “6” in the present embodiment. Regarding the success / failure random number table of the setting value “1” shown in FIG. 9A, the jackpot value at the normal (probability) in the random value range “0 to 65535” for both the first lottery and the second lottery. Is “0 to 205”. Furthermore, at the normal time, the random value range “206 to 64875” is an outlier for both the first lottery and the second lottery.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability (at the time of probability change), “206 to 615” is a big hit value for both the first lottery and the second lottery. Further, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random value range “616 to 64875” is a deviation value both at the normal time and at the time of the probability change. Further, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random value range “64876 to 65535” is a small hit value both at the normal time and at the time of probability change.

  FIG. 12 shows a list of hit values for each set value. Among these, for the set value “1”, as shown in FIG. 9A, “0 to 205” is the big hit value at the normal time. For this reason, the number of random number values is 206, and the normal hit probability is 1/318 (≈206 / 65536). On the other hand, for the set value “2”, the normal jackpot value is “0 to 206”. For this reason, the number of random numbers is 207, and the normal hit probability is 1/317 (≈207 / 65536).

  Further, for the set value “3”, the normal jackpot value is “0 to 207”. The number of random values is 208, and the normal hit probability is 1/315 (≈208 / 65536). As for the set value “4”, the normal jackpot value is “0 to 208”. The number of random values is 209, and the normal hit probability is 1/314 (≈209 / 65536).

  In addition, for the set value “5”, the normal jackpot value is “0 to 209”. The number of random values is 210, and the normal hit probability is 1/312 (≈208 / 65536). As for the set value “6”, the normal jackpot value is “0 to 210”. The number of random values is 211, and the normal hit probability is 1/311 (≈211 / 65536). Thus, the range of the big hit value is determined so that the big hit probability increases as the numerical value of the set value increases.

  For a high probability, the big hit value is “0 to 615” for the set value “1”, and the big hit probability is 1/106. For the setting values “2” to “6”, the jackpot values are “0 to 618”, “0 to 621”, “0 to 624”, “0 to 627”, and “0 to 630” in this order. The approximate jackpot probabilities are “1/106”, “1/105”, “1/105”, “1/104”, and “1/104” in this order.

  Here, the reason that the approximate jackpot probability includes the same value, such as “1/105” or “1/104”, is because the jackpot probability is expressed by rounding the numbers of the decimal points. In the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value is determined so that the big hit probability increases as the numerical value of the set value increases. Further, the probability ratio between the low probability and the high probability is “3 times” for all set values, and is common.

  For small hits, the random value range is “64876 to 65535” regardless of the set value in both normal and high probability cases. For this reason, the occurrence probability of small hits is 1/99 regardless of the probability state and the set value. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 12, the design values of the payout rate are 97%, 98%, 99%, 100%, 101%, and 102% for the set values “1” to “6”, respectively.

  In the examples of FIG. 9A and FIG. 12, “0”, which is the minimum value in the numerical range, is used as the big hit value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and “0” may be excluded from the big hit value. By doing so, for example, it is possible to prevent fraud in the event of a fraud that intentionally minimizes the acceptance random number value that is updated by, for example, resetting the power supply. Furthermore, it is possible not to assign “0” to a small hit or to assign a maximum value (here “65535”) to a big hit or a small hit.

In this embodiment, prior determination (so-called look-ahead) is performed on the result of lottery determination performed by using the random numbers shown in FIG. 9A and FIG. 12. This will be described later based on (a) and (b).
<< Various lottery functions related to normal symbols >>

  Next, the above-described ordinary drawing lottery means 113 will be described. The ordinary drawing lottery means 113 includes an ordinary figure lottery value acquiring means 129, an ordinary figure determination / notification determining means 130, an ordinary symbol determining means 131, and an ordinary figure pattern determining means 132. When the entrance determination unit 110 detects the passing of the game ball at the operation port 68, the general drawing lottery means 113 executes a lottery (normal drawing lottery) related to the normal symbol based on the detection result. To do.

  In this general drawing lottery, a general drawing lottery value, which is a random number (normal symbol random number) related to a normal symbol, is acquired by the general symbol lottery value acquisition unit 129, and the general symbol determination table 131 stores the general symbol determination table. Referenced. In the common figure determination table, the correspondence between the common figure lottery values and the types of normal symbols is defined. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol linked to the standard drawing lottery value is a hit, and if the hit is true, the hit type is determined. Is done.

  In addition, a common pattern pattern lottery value is acquired upon entering the operation port 68, and a variation pattern (normal diagram variation pattern) related to a normal symbol is obtained by the general pattern pattern determination unit 132 using the acquired common diagram pattern lottery value. ) Is determined. Each normal map variation pattern is associated with a general map pattern lottery value, which is a random number related to the normal map variation pattern (general pattern variation pattern random number), and is associated with the acquired general map pattern lottery value, and the state of the game The customary pattern variation pattern according to is determined.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the common figure lottery value and the common figure pattern lottery value, which are random numbers related to normal symbols, are created using only software random numbers.
<< Functions related to holding special symbols >>

  Next, the above-described hold control unit 114 will be described. The holding control unit 114 includes a first holding unit 133, a second holding unit 134, and a general drawing holding unit 135. Of these, the first holding means 133 is acquired by entering a ball when the predetermined start condition for the first special symbol is not satisfied when a new ball enters the first start winning opening 62. In addition, information (first special figure holding storage information) related to various random numbers (first winning / losing lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the first special symbol is set to four, and the hold related to the first special symbol is possible within a range not exceeding this upper limit value.

  The first special symbol or the second special symbol generated before the above-mentioned entrance is completed after the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that was executed when the above-mentioned entrance was made ends. In the case where there is no hold related to, the change start condition related to the first special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol change related to the first special symbol is permitted.

  The above-described second holding means 134 is also acquired by entering a ball when the predetermined start condition for variation according to the second special symbol is not satisfied when a new ball enters the second start winning opening 63. In addition, information related to various random numbers (second winning / failing lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored.

  When the change display of the second special symbol that has been executed when the above-mentioned entry is completed, the change start condition related to the second special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol change related to the second special symbol is established. Will be allowed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the second special symbol is set to four similarly to the first special symbol.

In the case of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described above, when the symbol for starting the special game is stopped and controlled to the special game, the variation start condition is determined after the special game is ended.
<< Functions related to holding regular symbols >>

  Next, the above-described ordinary map holding means 135 will be described. The general figure holding means 135, when there is a ball entering the operating port 68 (see FIG. 1), if a predetermined variation start condition related to the normal symbol is not satisfied, Information related to the value etc. (usual hold storage information) is temporarily stored. Then, until the variation start condition is satisfied, the variation display of the normal symbol related to the above-mentioned entry is not permitted. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the normal symbol is set to four, and the normal symbol can be reserved within a range not exceeding the upper limit value.

When the normal symbol change display that was executed when the above-mentioned entry was made ends, and the normal electric accessory is not activated, the change start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, and the new normal symbol Will be permitted.
<< Functions related to main control display >>

  Next, the main display control means 115 will be described. The main display control means 115 includes a first special figure control means 136, a second special figure control means 137, a general figure control means 138, a hold display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Among these, the first special symbol control means 136 changes the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 70 (see FIG. 7) according to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol determined by the first lottery means 111. Display is performed (for example, a blinking display in which a predetermined part of the LED indicators are blinked every 100 msec). Then, when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the first special symbol display unit 70 with the determined symbol.

  Furthermore, the second special symbol control means 137 follows the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112 according to the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112 if the above-described variation start condition relating to the second special symbol is satisfied. In FIG. 7), the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Then, when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the determined symbol in the second special symbol display unit 71.

  Further, the normal symbol control means 138 follows the normal symbol change pattern determined by the normal symbol lottery means 113 according to the normal symbol change pattern 59 (see FIG. 7), if the above-described change start condition relating to the normal symbol is satisfied. ) To display the variation of normal symbols. Further, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern has elapsed, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the normal symbol display unit 59 with the determined symbol.

Furthermore, the hold display control means 139 displays the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol described above. The number of reserved numbers is displayed on the first special symbol storage display unit 83, the second special symbol storage display unit 84, and the normal symbol storage display unit 85 of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. Is called. The other display control means 140 controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the normal symbol, and the various hold displays described above.
<< Functions related to special games >>

Next, the special game control means 116 will be described. The special game control means 116 determines that the special game operation condition is satisfied when the special symbol is stopped in the predetermined big hit mode when the big hit is made, and the predetermined game operation condition is determined according to the type of the big hit as described above. A special game to be opened is executed in a mode (a predetermined number of unit games or an opening pattern of a special winning opening during a unit game).
<< Functions related to specific games >>

  Next, the specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 performs control related to the above-described probability change, time reduction, and the like. The specific game control means 117 shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a probable change state or a short time state according to the type of jackpot. Probabilistic states are associated with some types of jackpots, not all types of jackpots. Further, for some big wins, the probability change state continues until the next big hit, and for other big wins with probability change, the total number of change displays after the special game is continued until a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) is reached. . During the probability changing state, the winning probability of the big hit by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a higher value than in the normal time when the probability is not changed.

  The time-saving state is continued until the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of end conditions (for example, 100 times) from the end of the special game. Furthermore, during the time reduction, the first pattern determination means 124 and the second pattern determination means 128 may change the time variation pattern so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is substantially shorter than the normal state. Select.

In addition, as described above, the easy-to-enter game is executed in conjunction with the execution of a short time as a specific game, and the operation of the ordinary electric accessory is facilitated, and is arranged at the entrance of the second starting prize opening. The opening and closing blades are easy to open. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing blades is controlled by an opening / closing control means 118 described later.
<< Functions related to open / close control >>

Next, the aforementioned opening / closing control means 118 will be described. The opening / closing control means 118 controls the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory (opening / closing blade) of the second start winning opening 63 and the large winning opening apparatus 90. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific manner, the opening / closing control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 76 to open the ordinary electric accessory at the second start winning prize port 63. Further, the opening / closing control means 118 performs control for sending an opening instruction to the special winning opening (opening) solenoid 80 in the special game, and opens the special winning opening device 90.
<< Functions related to prior information notification >>

  Next, the above-described advance information notification unit 119 will be described. The prior information notifying means 119 is acquired regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the pitch is put on hold when the first start winning slot 62 or the second start winning slot 63 is pitched. Further, a process for transmitting information related to various random number values to the sub board (here, the sub main board 301) as prior notification information is performed.

  As the above-mentioned prior notice information, each of the above-mentioned winning / losing lottery values (first winning / notifying lottery value or second winning / notifying lottery value), each symbol lottery value (first symbol lottery value or second symbol lottery value), each pattern Examples of information include what kind of success / failure range, symbol range, and pattern range the lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to.

Note that transmission of such advance notification information enables various pre-reading effects on the sub-board 104 side. And as a pre-reading effect, a hold notice, a continuous notice, etc. can be illustrated, but these details are mentioned below.
<< Functions related to command transmission >>

Next, the main command transmission unit 120 will be described. The main command transmission unit 120 transmits a command (main command) from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. The command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is performed including various information at various timings such as at the time of starting winning a prize, at the time of starting the change of the special symbol, at the time of stopping the change of the special symbol, or when the big hit occurs. .
<Basic function of sub-board>

  Next, basic functions of the sub-board 104 will be described. In the present embodiment, the sub board 104 includes a sub main board 301 and a sub sub board 302, and performs various functions such as command reception from the main board 102, effect pattern determination, effect display control, and effect execution.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the sub main board 301 has a main command receiving means 141, an effect pattern determining means 142, a sub main command transmitting means 143, and the like. Further, the sub-main board 301 is provided with functional means such as sound control means 144 for controlling speaker output and the like, and light control means 145 for controlling game effect lamp output and the like.

  The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining unit 142 includes a display effect displayed on the effect display device 60, and information specifying a sound effect and a light effect performed together with the display effect as necessary. During the fluctuation display of the symbol 190, an effect that suggests the high expectation level of the big hit is executed. Here, the “expectation” in this embodiment can be rephrased as “reliability”. In the following, “expectation” refers to the stage of production (normal pattern, chance-up pattern, final pattern) that enhances the expectation that will be a big hit by the fluctuation when it appears among patterns of the same kind of notice effect, or one effect The probability that a hit variation pattern is included in the variation pattern corresponding to one effect when the hit variation pattern (variation pattern in the hit variation) information and the deviation variation pattern information (variation pattern in the outlier variation) are generated. Each description of what is described may be used. In general, an “effect with a high degree of expectation” refers to an effect that is often a big hit when the effect occurs.

  When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining unit 142, effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub board 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmitting unit 143. Further, the command transmitted from the sub main board 301 to the sub sub board 302 includes sound information and the like in order to read out sound data, lamp data, and the like from the ROM of the sub sub board.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-sub board 302 includes sub-main command receiving means 146, effect execution control means 147, and the like. In the sub-sub board 302, the production execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301, thereby forming an animation image. Then, the effect display device 60 displays the effect animation.
<Specific example of specific game>

Next, a specific aspect of the specific game described above will be described. As described above, as a specific game, the probability variation function of special symbols (probability variation), the special symbol variation time shortening function (short time), and the easy entry game (ordinary symbol probability variation function, ordinary symbol variation time reduction) Function, a combination of the function of opening and extending a normal electric accessory). And at least any one of these various specific games is executed according to the result of the big hit lottery (a special symbol stop display symbol) or the result of the big hit game. In this embodiment, instead of the so-called ST machine described above, a specification in which a certain variation period continues until the next big hit is adopted for some big hits, but a specific aspect thereof will be described later.
<< Probability game >>

  The probability change described above is to change the probability state of the game related to the special symbol after the big hit so that the probability of occurrence of the big hit is higher than the normal probability state. In a pachinko gaming machine that employs ST, the duration (probability variation period) of the probability variation state is determined based on the number of changes in the special symbol.

The number of changes in the special symbol is determined as one time from the change display of the special symbol to the stop display. In the probability variation period in ST, the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the special game ends is set to a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). In this way, the function that allows the probability variation period to end before the next big hit occurs can be referred to as ST or number cut probability variation.
<< Variation time reduction game >>

  The above-mentioned time reduction is to shorten the variation time of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the main control display device 53 as compared with the case of the normal game. Here, “substantially shortening” is not always shorter than normal games in all cases, and in some cases, when the variation time of special symbols is equivalent to normal games or longer than normal games It can mean that According to this short time, since the variation time of the special symbol is shortened, even if a winning to the start winning port (the first starting winning port 62 and the second starting winning port 63) continuously occurs, a special symbol is generated. The change display and stop display of symbols can be smoothly advanced at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many opportunities for lottery lotteries.

  Furthermore, the duration of the short time state (short time period) is determined on the basis of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, similarly to the probability variation state. In this embodiment, the time-saving state is continued until the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the special game ends reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

  In the example described above, the probability variation period and the short time period are set to the same period, but the probability variation period and the short time period may be different from each other. For example, it is possible to set the probability variation period to 104 times and the short time period to 100 times. Further, the probability variation period and the short time period are not limited to being constant. For example, the probability variation period can be any of 4, 25, 100, etc., depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred. Also, the short time period can be set to any one of 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times, etc., depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred.

  It is also possible to provide a so-called falling lottery function. Examples of the falling lottery include the following. For example, after the probability variation and time reduction reach a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) less than the above-mentioned maximum number of variations (here, 100 times), for each variation of the special symbol until the maximum number of variations is reached, A lottery (specific game end lottery) is executed as to whether or not to end the probability change and time saving. When the specific game end lottery is won, the probability change and the time reduction are ended, and the game state from the next change returns to the normal state without the probability change and the time reduction.

Furthermore, it is not limited to executing both probability change and time saving, and it is also possible to execute only one of them in a specific game. For example, depending on the type of jackpot that has been won, it is possible to give only a short time and not to give a probability change, or to give only a probability change without giving a time reduction.
<< Easy entry game >>

  Next, the above described easy entry game will be described. This easy-to-enter game is a game state in which the function related to the ordinary electric accessory is advantageously set for the player, and the opening mode of the second start winning opening 63 can accept the game ball more easily than usual. is there. When the easy-to-enter game is executed, the control mode such as the short time related to the normal symbol, the probability variation related to the normal symbol, the open extension related to the normal electric accessory, or the combination of these control modes is used. The ease of entering the start winning opening 63 is enhanced, and an easy entry state is formed. In relation to this “Easy-to-Enter Game” and the aforementioned “Base”, “Electric Support”, etc., “High Base”, “High Base State”, “Low Base”, “Low Base State”, “ Terms such as “non-electric support” are used. In the following, “low base state” corresponds to “non-electric support state”, and “high base state” corresponds to “electric support state”.

  Among the various control modes described above for normal symbols, the short time for normal symbols is a control mode in which the fluctuation time of normal symbols is shorter than the normal state, and the probability variation for normal symbols is the probability of winning for normal symbols. Is a control mode (probability change related to normal symbols) that improves the level of the normal state. Furthermore, the opening extension related to the ordinary electric accessory is a control mode in which the opening time of the second start winning opening 63 is opened (long opening) longer than the opening (short opening) in normal time (non-specific game). is there.

  As described above, the easy-to-enter game during a specific game can be entered into the second start winning opening 63 by using three functions: normal symbol time reduction, open lottery probability change, and normal electric accessory opening extension. Increase ball ease. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which one or two of these three functions are used to improve the ease of entering the second start winning a prize opening 63. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which switches between the period which implements at least one of three functions, and the period which is not implemented according to a gaming state.

The duration of such easy-to-enter game can be determined based on the short period of time related to the special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the easy-to-enter game is continued during the short time related to the special symbol, and the easy-to-enter game is ended when the short time related to the special symbol ends. In such a case, a normal symbol variation pattern (ordinary symbol variation pattern) in which the symbol variation starts after the special symbol time has ended is provided for normal times (non-specific games). It is possible to be determined from among the variation patterns.
<Main effects on pachinko machines>
<< Basic display mode of production design >>

  Next, main effects of various effects executed by the sub main board 301 and the sub sub board 302 based on commands from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 will be described. Here, first, a basic display mode of the above-described effect design 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B) will be described.

  The effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 as the special symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 8A). Further, the effect symbol 190 is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8B) as the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53.

  The stop symbol displayed when the effect symbol 190 is stopped includes a combination of three symbols: a left effect symbol 190a, a middle effect symbol 190b, and a right effect symbol 190c. If the result of the big hit lottery on the main board 102 is a big win, for example, a combination of the three-colored gazes such as “777” and “555” is used as a stop symbol representing the big hit. Is displayed. Also, if the result of the big hit lottery is out of place, for example, “767”, “928”, “331”, etc. The symbol 190 is stopped and displayed.

  Here, “stop symbol” and “symbol stop” in the present embodiment mean that the three effect symbols 190 are “fixed stop”. That is, even if the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 in a state where, for example, a combination such as “767” or “928” is maintained, the “determination stop” alone It does not correspond to what you did. A state in which the production symbol 190 does not reach the “definite stop” while maintaining the combination in this way can be referred to as a “temporary stop” state.

  As a display mode of such “temporary stop”, for example, a state in which the production symbol 190 is oscillating (shaking) in small increments can be exemplified. A temporary stop mode in which the production symbol 190 is oscillating in small increments while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a “sway fluctuation” mode. As an aspect of the production pattern 190 in the “temporary stop”, vertical or horizontal linear movement, horizontal rotational movement, and the like can be exemplified, and the movement range can be exemplified by several millimeters.

  Moreover, as a display mode of the above-mentioned “determined stop”, a state where all effect symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining a combination through a temporary stop state can be exemplified. Furthermore, during this “determination stop”, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the determination has been stopped. And as an effect indicating that it has been confirmed and displayed, the state of confirmed stop is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), or the effect symbols 190a to 190c that have been confirmed and stopped are added with special effects. And the like (design effect), turning on an LED (lamp) provided on the center decoration 64, and the like.

  Here, as the symbol effect, each effect symbol 190a to 190c is illuminated only momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds), and a bright spot is circulated once or a plurality of times around each effect symbol 190a to 190c. It is possible to employ various modes such as enlarging or reducing the symbols 190a to 190c and moving the effect symbols 190a to 190c by several millimeters to return them to their original positions.

  In addition, in the above-described “reach” display mode, there may be a case where an effect design maintaining the reach combination is displayed in the above-mentioned “temporary stop” mode. Then, after the reach display by this “temporary stop”, the symbols that have been displayed in a variable manner (in this case, the medium effect design 190b) constitute a combination of outliers (a combination of outlier reach), and “temporarily stop”. An effect can be illustrated in which “determination stop” is performed while keeping the change and the variable display ends. In addition, from the state in which the three effect symbols 190a to 190c perform “temporary stop” by the combination of the outlier reach, the medium effect symbol 190b resumes the fluctuation and the reach effect is highly reliable (reliability related to the big hit A production (second-half reach) such as a relatively high degree) can be exemplified.

  Note that the scroll display mode of the effect symbol 190 is not limited to the above-described vertical scroll, and various display modes can be employed. As other display modes, for example, a horizontal scroll mode in the horizontal direction (such as from right to left) or the left performance symbol 190a to the right performance symbol 190c are individually rotated (rotated) around the vertical axis. A rotation mode for performing variable display can be exemplified. In addition, for example, the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c are enlarged along the straight or curved (turning) trajectory in the display area 194 from the rear to the front, that is, from the back to the front of the screen. A display mode of sequentially feeding out can also be exemplified. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a scroll display mode in which the effect design directed from the rear to the front descends from the upper side to the lower side.

  In addition, the scroll mode is not limited to adopting any one of the various modes as described above. For example, when a predetermined effect is executed, the scroll mode is switched from the predetermined scroll mode to another scroll mode. It is also possible. Moreover, it is also possible to change a scroll aspect for every production mode about several production modes.

  8A and 8B illustrate a display mode in which the combination of effect symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle in the vertical direction of the display area 194. The effective line is in the horizontal direction. There is only one line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of effective lines may be 2 lines or 5 lines.

Further, in FIG. 8 (b), the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c are simplified by only numbers of a predetermined font, but the effect design 190 is illustrated in FIG. 33 (b). In addition, a combination of a part that represents a predetermined symbol such as a number (an element symbol that is a symbol element effect design described above) and a part that includes a pattern that represents something other than the predetermined symbol (an element symbol that is a non-symbol element effect design) Can be configured. And as a part which consists of a picture which expresses other than a predetermined symbol, various design pictures, a person picture, and these combinations etc. can be illustrated, Furthermore, various design pictures and a person picture combined with a symbol are animated. It is also possible. In the example of FIG. 33 (b), a heart pattern is adopted as a pattern representing other than a predetermined symbol.
<< Example of production pattern >>

  Next, the effect pattern described above will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state associated with a variation pattern determined by the main board 102. Further, the effect pattern includes an effect pattern including the effect symbol 190. More specifically, the production pattern defines a production process such as a change process from the start of change to a change stop for the selected production symbol 190, a background displayed in combination with the production symbol 190, and story development. Yes. The production patterns include those corresponding to “with reach” and “without reach” described above.

  Among these, when the effect pattern “with reach” is executed, a reach effect that is a big hit if another effect symbol (in this case, the medium effect symbol 190 b) is arranged is performed on the effect display device 60. When the result of the winning / losing lottery concerning the special symbol is a big hit, the display of the rough lines such as “777” and “333” corresponding to the type of the big win is performed by the effect symbol 190 which has been confirmed and stopped. Further, when the result of the lottery determination relating to the special symbol is a loss, for example, a combination indicating a loss such as “767” or “515” is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been confirmed and stopped.

  Furthermore, when the production pattern of “no reach” is executed, for example, “928”, “331”, and the like, a combination without reach in which the left production design 190a and the right production design 190c are not a combination of reach, This is performed by the production symbol 190 that has been confirmed and stopped.

Some of these performance patterns have various long and short variation times. Particularly, the variation pattern of “with reach” includes one having a variation time of several minutes. In the present embodiment, “no reach (about 3 seconds to 10 seconds)” and “normal reach (10 seconds to 20 seconds) in the variation pattern (see FIGS. 11A to 11C) related to the special symbol described above. Degree) ”and“ super reach (high reach reliability reach) (about 30 seconds to 2 minutes) ”, there are provided an effect pattern without reach, an effect pattern with normal reach, and an effect pattern with super reach. For example, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one effect pattern, and the number of effect patterns is more diverse than the above-described change patterns. Furthermore, “super reach” can be rephrased as “SP (special) reach”.
<< Holding effect display related to special design >>

  Next, the hold display (hold effect display) related to the special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. In the lower part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), a first number-of-holds display section 196 indicating the number of hold of the winning / failing lottery value in the first game, A second number-of-holds display section 197 that indicates the number of hold of the winning / failing lottery value in two games is displayed. Here, in order to simplify the explanation and illustration, each hold display is represented by a perfect circle, but the hold display may be performed by a combination of other shapes and colors, a character image, an animation, or the like.

  In this embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is performed on the first hold number display section 196 described above. Further, when the number of holds increases, a hold display is added. Then, when the number of holds reaches the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 8A, four hold displays are performed in the first hold number display section 196.

  Further, the hold display in the first hold number display section 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first hold number display unit 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the rightmost part of the first hold number display unit 196 when viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. A second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Further, hereinafter, the hold display performed from the first display position to the fourth display position will be referred to as “hold 1”, “hold 2”, “hold 3”, and “hold 4”, respectively.

  For example, in the effect display device 60, in the situation where the effect symbol 190 related to the first game is being performed and one hold display is not performed on the first hold number display unit 196, the hold is generated. Then, the hold display is performed at the first display position on the right end (the position of the above-described “hold 1”). At this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been performed yet, and “Hold 2” to “Hold 4” have not occurred. In this situation, when “hold 1” is generated, if the hold is further generated, the display related to the generated hold is performed at the position of “hold 2” to the left of “hold 1”. Then, when “hold 1” and “hold 2” are displayed, and “hold 3” and “hold 4” are not displayed, if a further hold occurs, “hold 3” is displayed according to the number of holds that have occurred. Or “Hold 4” is displayed.

  Then, if the change display that was executed when “Hold 1” occurs and other change start conditions related to the first game are also satisfied, the above-described hold memory information related to “Hold 1” is stored. At the stage of digestion, the “hold 1” hold display moves to the right side of the first hold number display section 196. The variation information display unit 195 is provided on the right side of the first hold number display unit 196. The variation information display unit 195 is an area for displaying information (variation information) related to the variation display being executed at that time. That is, the hold display of “hold 1” moves to the change information display unit 195 and changes to the change information display 198 when the change display related to the corresponding hold storage information is executed.

  Here, when the hold display of “hold 1” is moved to the change information display unit 195, display elements such as a size, a color, and a form related to the item may be changed. In the example of FIGS. 8A and 8B, the size is increased when the hold display of “HOLD 1” is changed to the change information display 198.

  As described above, when the hold display in “hold 1” moves to the fluctuation information display unit 195, the standby order of the subsequent hold display is advanced, and “hold 2” is shifted to the position of “hold 1”. Further, when “Take 3” or “Take 4” exists, “Take 3” is shifted to the “Take 2” position, and “Take 4” is shifted to the “Take 3” position. If a further hold occurs in such a situation, a new “hold 4” occurs and the number of holds reaches the upper limit. If no new hold is generated, the hold display is shifted with the start of the next variable display, and the standby order of each hold is advanced.

  In addition, it can be understood as a hold effect in a broad sense, including the state of change from the hold display in “hold 1” to “hold 4” to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195. Not only this, but also the hold display in “hold 1” to “hold 4” is set as the hold display, and the state changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display. It is also possible.

  In addition, if there is no change display related to the production symbol 190 and the number of holds is 0, and there is a ball in the first start winning opening 62, the display of “Hold 1” is not performed (or displayed for a moment). The variation information display 198 is directly performed on the variation information display unit 195. And only in such a case, it is possible to handle such that the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display section 195 is not included in the hold display.

  Then, although the above-mentioned 2nd reservation number display part 197 is demonstrated, description is abbreviate | omitted about the point similar to the 1st reservation number display part 196. FIG. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second number-of-holds display unit 197 is located on the opposite side of the first number-of-holds display unit 196 (on the right side as viewed from the player) with the variation information display unit 195 described above interposed therebetween. ) In a color different from the first reserved image, so that the relations of “Take 1” to “Take 4” are symmetric.

  Further, the hold display can be performed in a manner corresponding to various game states. For example, when the probability of a big hit lottery is a normal probability and a high probability, and when the display mode is controlled to be different, the display mode of each other can be changed.

Further, the positional relationship between the first hold number display unit 196, the second hold number display unit 197, and the variation information display unit 195 is not limited to the above-described one, and the second game is played as in this embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine of the type that does not execute in priority to one game but displays the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol 190 in the order of occurrence of the start winnings relating to the first game and the second game, the variation information display section Eight on-hold displays may be arranged on the left side of 195.
<< Reservation pre-reading effect related to special design >>

  Next, a reservation prefetch effect that is one of the notice effects (prefetch effects) related to the special symbol will be described. This reserved pre-reading effect is an effect that is executed based on the above-described reserved memory information (first special figure reserved memory information or second reserved memory information). Furthermore, the hold prefetching effect uses the above-mentioned prior information notification function, and a reach or a big hit occurs for a hold that is digested later than the effect currently performed using the effect symbol 190 or the like. It is performed as an effect that suggests the expectation of doing.

  For example, unlike the display (for example, blue) which is the basic display mode in which the hold change is not made with respect to the hold display generated at the position of “hold 3” in the first hold number display unit 196 described above, the green hold display By performing the above, it is shown that the degree of expectation such as the occurrence of reach is higher than in the case of a normal blue mode. In addition to the colors of blue and green, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, rainbow, and predetermined patterns are provided. Expectations of big hits in the order of yellow, red, gold, rainbow, and predetermined patterns rather than green There is an effect that shows that the degree is high.

  Here, as a display mode of the above-mentioned “predetermined pattern”, an animal pattern such as a giraffe, a display mode including a predetermined character image, and the like can be exemplified. It is also possible to employ not only the color and pattern of the hold display but also items other than the perfect circle shape, person images, and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a pre-reading effect by combining the various display modes described above with a mode in which blinking or light emission is performed. In addition, a hold that has hit a prefetch effect including a hold prefetch effect can be referred to as “trigger hold”, for example.

  The pre-reading effect related to the hold as described above may be performed in the second game. Regarding the second game, in addition to the basic color (orange), display modes such as red, gold, rainbow, and a predetermined pattern can be provided. In addition, as the hold display related to the second game, it is also possible to adopt items other than the perfect circle shape, person images, and the like.

  Further, the pre-reading effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be referred to as “hold change” or the like. Such “holding change” includes a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the occurrence of the hold, and a change in display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold. is there.

  Among these, as an indication of the change in the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold, for example, the hold is generated and the hold display is started, the hold is digested, and the hold display is, for example, “hold 2”, An example in which the hold display changes while proceeding with “hold 1” can be exemplified. Then, for example, when a hold occurs, the hold display is performed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the position “Hot 3”, and when moving to the position “Hold 1”, other colors such as green are displayed. Is changed.

  In addition, in both the first game and the second game, when the change information display 198 is displayed, the hold display is changed from a basic color to a display mode such as red, gold, rainbow, a predetermined pattern, or the like. There are cases where the degree of expectation of jackpot is expressed by changing to a display form such as a non-circular item or a person image.

  Furthermore, the following can be illustrated as a control aspect which concerns on the above hold changes. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) for determining an effect pattern (hold change pattern) of the hold change is performed. The hold change pattern lottery uses a hold change pattern table. In this hold change pattern table, the presence or absence of a hold change and when to execute a hold change (when there is a hold change), what timing Items relating to the determination of the production pattern, such as what display mode to execute, are defined. In addition, as the hold change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are defined.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of holdings in “holding 1” to “holding 4” that correspond to the holding change, it is possible to cancel one of the holding pre-reading effects. More specifically, for example, when “hold 4” occurs, the hold related to “hold 4” hits the hold change pattern that changes to green, and any of the holds that have occurred first If the holding change pattern that changes to a rainbow color is hit, the holding relating to the above-mentioned “hold 4” can be exemplified by canceling the holding change and not executing it.

Furthermore, for example, when “Hold 4” occurs as in the above example, the hold related to “Hold 4” hits the hold change pattern that changes to the rainbow color, and all the hold that has occurred previously However, if the change does not change up to the rainbow color and changes only on hold until green or the like, the hold that has occurred can be exemplified by canceling the change on hold and not executing it. In addition, when performing a change on hold, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting that the change on hold is performed (sometimes referred to as a “hold change suggestion effect”), which will be described later.
<< Continuous notice concerning special design >>

  Next, as another pre-reading effect pattern, a continuous notice (continuous effect) related to a special symbol will be described. There are genuine and pseudo-continuous notices. Of these, genuine continuous notices mean that the notices have a continuous notice effect over multiple variable displays related to special symbols. ing. In addition, the pseudo continuous notice means that an intermittent notice effect (pseudo continuous notice) is performed such that there is a plurality of special symbol fluctuations for one change display related to the special symbol.

  As the above-mentioned “continuous notice”, for example, the character who is the main character in the story on the stage moves to different rooms sequentially for the room that is the final destination for each change of the special symbol. Such a thing can be illustrated. In addition, the “continuous notice” in other aspects is that the main character is to win against the different enemies and aim at the enemy as the final goal for each change of the special symbol. Can also be illustrated.

  Further, the genuine continuous notice described above (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “continuous notice”) can be performed based on the prior notice information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. More specifically, for example, based on the prior notification information received when the “hold 3” suspension occurs, the sub-main board 301 has an effect pattern corresponding to the variable display related to the special symbol after that. For example, it is possible to select a content including a continuous notice over three fluctuation displays.

  Then, when the hold for one time is exhausted and the hold for the above-mentioned “hold 3” is shifted to the position of “hold 2”, the first one of the effect patterns related to the selected continuous notice is displayed. An effect pattern related to the notice is executed. Further, when the hold is sequentially digested and the hold display is moved from “Hot 2” to “Hold 1”, the second notice of the three times is executed, and the fluctuation information display from “Hold 1”. When moving to section 195, the final third notice is executed.

  In the sub-main board 301, the change pattern related to the change display executed when the above-described “hold 3” hold occurs, and “hold 2” or “hold 1” generated before that. It is also possible to check the hold storage information. In other words, when the above-mentioned “hold 3” hold occurs, information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with a high jackpot reliability is executed or a big hit is generated among various stored information. If there is information indicating that the event is to be performed, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern related to the continuous notice selected when the “hold 3” hold occurs. In addition, according to the degree of hold expectation for “Take 3”, continuous notification is not immediately made from the next change. There may be cases where continuous notices are made over fluctuations.

  In addition, as the above-described pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter may be referred to as “pseudo continuous notice”), reach display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in the effect pattern related to the single variable display of the special symbol. Such a case, a case where a character repeats an action a plurality of times, a case where a temporary stop and re-variation of the effect design 190 are repeated, and the like can be exemplified.

Note that the contents of the continuous notice as described above are merely examples, and various contents other than those described can be adopted as the contents of the continuous notice.
<< Directing design related to normal design >>

  Next, an effect related to the above-described normal symbol will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, the effect related to the normal symbol can be performed as a part of the effect in the effect display device 60. And when performing the effect display of a normal symbol in this way, as the effect symbol, for example, it is conceivable to perform a display that can discriminate between a loss and a winning type.

  Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, a relatively large display body and a smaller display body (or a plurality of display bodies) may be provided. It is possible. The large display body can be referred to as, for example, “main display body” or “main liquid crystal”, and the small display body can be referred to as, for example, “sub display body” or “sub liquid crystal”. Furthermore, when the relatively small display body as described above is provided, the effect design (199) related to the normal design may be displayed on the small display body, for example. In addition, for example, an LED display lamp may be provided in a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as an effect display device related to a normal design.

In addition, when performing an effect using the effect symbol related to the normal symbol, the hold effect display related to the normal symbol can be performed as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. In addition, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect hold display related to the normal symbol is, for example, a small display. You may make it display on a body. In addition, for example, an LED indicator lamp which is a set of two LED lamps is provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and thereby, an effect display of the number of holdings related to the normal symbols “1” to “4” is performed. Also good.
<< Direction related to limited frequency pattern >>

  Next, an effect related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as “limited frequency pattern effect”) will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as a part of the aforementioned effect pattern. Further, the limited frequency pattern effect is an effect set so as to easily appear in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the variation pattern determined in a specific period by the pattern determining means of the main board. The content of this limited frequency pattern effect is an effect content indicating a specific tendency. As the content of the limited frequency pattern effect, for example, a predetermined variation pattern in a specific variation during a short-time game is used on the main board. An example of such a decision that always generates a highly reliable reach as an effect can be given.

In addition, as a gaming situation in which a limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, at the start of the game, immediately after a predetermined effect pattern is executed (for example, immediately after a small hit or a big hit without a ball), during a predetermined effect mode (probability change, For example, during the short-time game mode) or immediately after the end of the special game. In addition to these, as a gaming situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, when the number of holds related to the first game (or the second game) reaches a predetermined number (for example, four), The case where it does not exist can also be illustrated. Further, in a situation where a limited frequency pattern effect is executed, a limited frequency table provided in advance according to the situation at that time is used, and an effect pattern to be executed is determined from the limited frequency pattern defined in the limited frequency table. It is to be selected.
<< Direction using operation buttons >>

  Next, an effect using the operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) described above (hereinafter referred to as “button effect”) will be described. When the button effect is executed, the operation button 22 is pressed by the player and exhibits a function of giving the player a feeling that he / she participates in the game effect or the lottery. is there. As the button effect, for example, in the process of changing display of the effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B), “Push”, “sequential hitting” are displayed on the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 together with the symbol of the operation button 22. For example, it is possible to exemplify performing a guide display for prompting an operation such as a character such as “Please press” or “Long press” or a moving image of an indicator indicating the remaining time.

  Furthermore, examples of the button effect include an effect in which a character makes a comment when a player operates the operation button 22 in accordance with the above-described guide display, and an effect in which an ally character attacks an enemy character. In addition, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-described movable effect member (601 to 603, etc.) is activated to notify that reach is reached. Further, a button effect may be performed during the reach effect. In this case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect members (601 to 603, etc.) are activated to expect the big hit. Can also be illustrated.

  Further, regarding the above-described operation button 22, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally disabled, but the button operation effective period in which the operation of the operation button 22 is enabled during the button production. The button operation effective period is a predetermined time set in advance.

  In addition, various types of operation input devices such as the operation button 22 can be employed. For example, an operation handle of an automobile, an operation lever of an aircraft, a model of a character related to the production contents. (Figure) with touch sensor added can be used. In addition, it is possible to provide an operation button and an operation lever or the like in combination, and use them according to the situation such as the contents of the production.

Further, as described above, the cross key 96 (FIG. 21) is provided in the vicinity of the operation button 22, and the operation button 22 may be used as a determination key or the like in a situation where environment setting or the like is performed. In the present embodiment, the rendering operation using the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 is performed in a situation where the effect display device 60 is performing the variable display of the effect symbol 190 or the like, or in the situation where the variable display is not performed. It may be done.
<< Direction when jackpot occurs >>

  Next, an effect when a big hit occurs will be described. When a big hit occurs, the effects at the start of a special game (a jackpot start demonstration), the effects during a special game (round effect), the effects at the end of the last round (hit end demo), at the end of the special game There is a production (a jackpot end demo). Here, the effect of the above-mentioned big hit start demonstration is the effect during the period in which the closing of the attacker (big prize opening) is maintained from the start of the execution of the big hit game (special game) to the start of the first round (unit game). The effect of the above-mentioned big hit end demonstration is the period during which the closing of the attacker (big prize opening) is maintained from the end of execution of the final round (unit game) to the end of execution of the big hit game (special game). It can be said that it is a production.

  When the above-mentioned production symbol 190 is confirmed and stopped, a display indicating that the big hit is started is performed with a sound such as a fanfare. As an indication that the big hit is started, the display of the big hit start demonstration screen shown in FIG. 38A can be exemplified. Further, it is possible to exemplify a content in which a right-handed guidance effect is executed as an instruction for how to hit during a special game, and the player is guided to increase the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 to make a right-handed strike. Further, as a display of the content to be guided to make a right stroke, a message such as “Turn the handle to the right” can be displayed in the right stroke guidance display area 383 of FIG.

  Here, the content of the presentation at the start of the big hit may be different between the first hit (big hit on the low base) and Renso (big hit on the high base). Specifically, a display such as “starting a big hit!” May be displayed at the time of first hit, and “continuous big hit!” May be displayed at the time of hitting a consecutive villa. As for right-handed guidance, the message “Turn the handle to the right” is displayed at the beginning, but such message display is not performed at Renso or a different display (simply “right-handed”). Or the like may be displayed for a short time. In this way, the jackpot start demonstration performance at the time of the consecutive hits may be shorter than the jackpot start demonstration performance at the time of the first hit. It becomes shorter at the time of consecutive resorts. Similarly, the time value of the big hit end demonstration production (big hit start demonstration time) may be shorter at the time of the consecutive resort than at the first hit. In addition, regarding touch effects that can be performed during the jackpot start demonstration described later, the contents of the effects and whether or not the execution of the effects is allowed based on the number of consecutive games or the case of first hits or consecutive games. Can also be associated.

  As an effect during the above-mentioned special game, a moving image whose contents cannot be viewed unless the player has won a big hit can be exemplified. At this time, predetermined music is output from the aforementioned speaker 21 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, as a video during the special game, for example, a scene in which a predetermined character in a play picture adopted for the production of the pachinko gaming machine 10 fights a rival enemy or a state of enjoying a trap. Can be exemplified. Here, in FIG. 38 (b), as a moving image during a special game, a scene of a moving image in which two women fight against an enemy is illustrated.

  In addition, for example, “1R”, “2R”,..., “15R”, “1 round”, “2 round”,. It is possible to notify by such a display. Further, as a part of the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to display the number of occurrence of the big hit when the big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hits are continuous.

  In the display example of FIG. 38B, a number-of-holds display area 367 is displayed at the bottom of the screen so as to distinguish between the number of holds in FIGS. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 38B, a reduced effect symbol display area 361, a round number display area 368, and a count number display area 369 are displayed. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 38 (b), the number of consecutive resorts related to a large number of big hit games is displayed in the upper right part of the screen by a display such as “first probability change” or “195 acquired”. The number of winning balls in the Renso is displayed.

  Here, not only the winning ball due to the game in the round (by entering the big winning opening (90)) is set as the display target of the number of winning prize balls, but the same launch position as the big winning opening (90) ( A winning ball based on a winning in a general winning opening (reference number omitted) arranged in the launch direction may also be a display target of the number of winning winning balls. In addition, when a so-called over-winning (exceeding a specified count in one round with respect to a large winning opening) has occurred, an effect that suggests or notifies the occurrence (for example, “ Sound output such as “Tane!” Or “Nice!” In the production display may be performed).

  Further, as the effects during the special game, for example, a specific effect (a specific effect during the win) as shown in FIGS. 38 (c) and 39 (a) to 39 (c) can be performed. 38 (c) and FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c) exemplify hitting specific effect screens AD. These hit specific indication screens A to D are displayed as an opportunity to change the story development, or inserted as a branching point of the effect when the number of rounds is promoted during the big hit game or the promotion effect to the probability change is performed. It can be used for purposes such as. The meanings and contents of the display examples in FIGS. 38C and 39A to 39C will be described later.

  Subsequently, examples of the effects after the special game include those related to the result of the effects during the special game. More specifically, the content etc. which a winner expresses an emotion according to the result of the battle between characters can be illustrated. Such an effect after the special game can also be called an ending effect.

  Furthermore, examples of the effects after the special game include a display that additionally displays the number of consecutive big hits, and a display that displays the number of prize balls acquired by the player through the special game at that time. It is also possible to additionally display the number of occurrences of jackpots when jackpots occur during a specific game and the jackpots continue. In addition, regarding the success of the big hit, when the number of occurrence of the big hit reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern that is not selected before that.

  FIG. 37 (c) shows a screen display example at the time of the big hit end demonstration. At the time of the big hit end demonstration, characters such as “end” indicating the end of the big hit game are displayed. Further, a lower message display area 364 is displayed at the lower part of the screen, and a message “Change to standby screen by touching the handle, and transition to the customization screen by turning on the production button” is displayed. In the jackpot end demo screen, it is also possible to display the number of winning prize balls during the jackpot game or in the retreat. In the example of FIG. 37 (c), “big hit + 1” and “acquired number: 1500” are displayed in the lower left part of the screen.

  In addition, if the type of jackpot includes a jackpot that does not involve a probability change, the notification as to whether or not the probability will change after the end of the special game should not be notified during the special game or until the end of the special game. Is also possible.

  For example, if a total of 10 rounds of special games are played, there will be no effect that tells the player whether or not the game is going to be probable until the end of the 8th round. In the case of winning, it is possible to adopt an effect or a control mode in which an effect (a specific effect during the hit) is performed over one or more rounds.

  Similarly, when a game ball is detected in a predetermined area at a predetermined timing, such as before a special game is started, during a special game, or at the end of a special game, in a pachinko game machine including a big hit without a probability change It is also possible to adopt effects and control modes such that is likely to change.

  In this case, for example, a ball entry device (herein referred to as “V ball entry device”) having a detection area for a game ball is added to a part below the big winning opening in the game area 52 (see FIG. 1). Provide. Further, at a predetermined timing such as at the end of the special game, the V pitching device is set in a state where it can accept a gaming ball. In this state, when a gaming ball is detected by the V pitching device, the probability state thereafter is The control is performed so that the probability variation state is maintained over a predetermined period. When the game ball does not enter the V entry device, or when the game ball does not enter the predetermined area in the V entry device, control is performed so that the probability state after that does not become the probability change state. It may be possible to do so.

  Further, such a certainty change by entering can be given only as an effect. That is, when a big hit with certainty is won in the big hit lottery, the V pitching device is set in a state in which a game ball can be received at a predetermined timing. Then, if a distribution mechanism is provided in the V pitching device and a big hit with a certain probability change is made in advance, the game ball that has entered the V pitching device is guided to the probability variation region, and the player is surely changed. Execute the effect to the effect that you won. In addition, when a big hit without probability change is hit in advance, it is conceivable that the game ball is led to a non-probability change (normal) area and an effect that the player has acquired the probability change is executed.

  Subsequently, examples of the effects after the special game include those related to the result of the effects during the special game. More specifically, the content etc. which a winner expresses an emotion according to the result of the battle between characters can be illustrated. Such an effect after the special game can also be called an ending effect.

  Furthermore, examples of the effects after the special game include a display that additionally displays the number of consecutive big hits, and a display that displays the number of prize balls acquired by the player through the special game at that time. It is also possible to additionally display the number of occurrences of jackpots when jackpots occur during a specific game and the jackpots continue. In addition, regarding the success of the big hit, when the number of occurrence of the big hit reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern that is not selected before that.

In addition, when a small hit occurs, it is not possible to distinguish between whether or not there is an effect of notifying the occurrence of the small hit and whether or not the game is in a probable change during the game after the small hit occurs. It is conceivable to produce content.
<Various specific production examples>
<< Production by superimposing multiple production members >>

  Next, various specific effects that can be implemented in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with examples. First, it is possible to perform an effect by displaying the effect display device 60, displaying the light guide plate 88 described above, and superimposing a movable effect member. This type of effect is a complex effect obtained by positioning the movable effect member in front of the effect display device 60 and combining the display content of the effect display device 60 with the light decoration or movement of the movable effect member.

  As an example, in a state where any movable effect member protrudes in front of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, at least a part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 can be seen outside the movable effect member. For example, in the case where an image of a flame burning up is displayed on the effect display device 60, an effect of a combination in which the movable effect member performs light decoration and operation is executed in front of the flame. Furthermore, in the light guide plate 88, for example, by performing an effect in which a flame pattern blinks or an effect in which a ripple pattern is blinked, the difference in distance between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60 is caused. Visual effects can be demonstrated.

  Furthermore, in this state, by executing the effect by the movable effect member between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60, the state of the movable effect member and the image of the effect display device 60 are displayed on the light guide plate 88. The player can be visually recognized while partially obstructing. Furthermore, by combining the changes in the pattern display before and after the movable effect member, a complicated situation display can be superimposed on the movable effect member, and the environment where the movable effect member is placed can be expressed in a complex manner. .

  And by these things, a more complicated effect can be performed with the limited structure of the light guide plate 88, the movable effect member, and the effect display device 60, and the effect can be diversified. Even when the light guide plate 88 is changed to, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display body, a part of the transmissive liquid crystal display body is visually recognized as a part of the display contents of the movable display member and the display display device 60 behind. By setting the transmission state as much as possible, it is possible to produce an effect by superposition as in the case of the light guide plate 88.

  Further, as a mode of use of the light guide plate 88 and the transmissive liquid crystal display body (referred to as the light guide plate 88 or the like here), a mode in which the light guide plate 88 or the like is emphasized and a mode in which the effect display device 60 is combined are adopted. It is possible. In the above-described “mode for emphasizing the light guide plate 88 and the like”, a color display that makes a predetermined image emerge using most of the display surface of the light guide plate 88 and the like is displayed on the display content of the effect display device 60 behind. This is a display mode in which the player's consciousness is not directed as much as possible.

On the other hand, the above-described “mode by combination with the effect display device 60” suppresses the ratio of the area of the light guide plate 88 or the like where the color display is performed to a predetermined level, and displays the effect display device 60 behind. This is a display mode in which the player's consciousness is directed to the contents, and an effect that combines the display of the light guide plate 88 and the display of the effect display device 60 is shown to the player. Then, in a predetermined case, an effect in the “mode that emphasizes the light guide plate 88 and the like” is executed, and in other predetermined cases, an effect in the “mode in combination with the effect display device 60” is executed. Is possible.
<< Direction using hold display >>

  Then, various things can be illustrated as an effect using the above-mentioned hold display. For example, a pending change suggesting effect that suggests that a pending change is performed is exemplified, and the variation information display 198 of the variation information display unit 195 shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B is temporarily deleted, and the variation The information display unit 195 displays character information (character state transition suggestion information) that suggests that the reserved color changes and the expectation level increases, such as “color change?”. After such display of the state transition suggestion information, the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 may change to something that represents a high degree of expectation, such as red or rainbow color, for example. To do.

  It is also possible to display a display such as “color change?” As one symbol of a roulette eye or one symbol of a rotating drum (reel). For example, information display such as “no change”, “color change?”, “Red”, “rainbow” is adopted as the roulette eye or the design of the rotating drum, and the fluctuation information display unit 195 uses the roulette or rotation. Displays the drum object. Then, in the variation information display section 195, the display of “no change”, “color change?”, “Red”, “rainbow” sequentially changes, and the subsequent variation information display in a manner corresponding to the stopped information. It is conceivable that 198 is performed. It is also possible to display roulette or rotating drum objects without deleting the variation information display 198.

  Further, as another aspect of the effect using the hold display, when the hold change is performed in the first hold number display unit 196 or the second hold number display unit 197 in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the hold is performed. For example, it is possible to actively notify that a change has occurred or that a hold change will occur immediately by displaying hold change information such as “hold change”, “red hold”, “rainbow hold”, etc. It is done. Here, such hold change information may be displayed in the center of the display area 194 in the effect display device 60, or in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197, the hold change information is displayed. It may be performed in the vicinity of the hold display.

As described above, one or a plurality of types of pending change suggesting effects that suggest that a pending change will be made are provided, and whether or not the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the ratio of the pending change or the pending change is made. It is also preferable that the degree of change (for example, the rate at which the reserved color changes from blue to red differs between type A and type B) is different. Also, if there are multiple hold indications and changes in hold can be made for multiple hold indications, it is not possible to know which hold changes will be made at the start of the hold change suggestion effect. If configured in this way, it is possible to improve the interest from the viewpoint of whether the previously changed hold changes further or whether the hold that has not changed changes.

  In addition, when the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the hold change timing can be various timings during symbol variation. For example, if the reserved change suggestion effect uses an area or image object dedicated to the reserved change suggestion, a plurality of start / ends can be performed at any timing that does not overlap with the fixed stop period of the decorative symbol (effect symbol) Timing can be set.

  On the other hand, when the reserved change suggestion effect is not dedicated to the reserved change suggestion and is performed in conjunction with the decorative symbol variation effect, for example, a pseudo decorative pattern that suggests a reserved change using the display area of the decorative pattern, for example. A hold change suggestion effect that displays (for example, “hold change symbol”) can be executed. In this case, it is possible to set the timing when the symbols of one or a plurality of columns are temporarily stopped and the timing of notifying the stopped symbols.

In addition to the various hold change timings described here, the hold color can be changed at the start or shift of the hold display.
<Various commands transmitted from the main board to the sub main board>

  Next, main commands for various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 will be described. First, as command transmission timing, during initial screen display, during customer waiting demo (standby demo), at the time of special symbol change start, at the time of special symbol determination, at the time of special symbol determination, at the time of jackpot start demonstration, There are times when the jackpot is open, the jackpot is closed, the winning demonstration is over, and the jackpot is ended. Among these, the initial screen display is a period from when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is powered on until the customer waiting demonstration starts and enters a steady state. In addition, command transmission is performed in any case at the time of start winning, at the time of power failure recovery, and at the time of error detection. Furthermore, command transmission is executed even when the RWM is cleared.

  Among these, commands for RWM clear include commands for effect display initialization, effect LED initialization, and various errors. The effect indicator initialization command is for displaying a predetermined effect symbol on the effect display device 60. The effect LED initialization command is to turn on a part of the game effect lamp when communication is normal. The various error commands are used for effect display according to the error state.

  As a customer waiting demo command, there is a customer waiting demo command. The customer waiting demo command is used to set the effect display device 60 and the game effect lamp for the customer waiting demo and erase the sound.

  As a command at the time of starting the symbol change of the special symbol, the number of symbols 1 stored, the number of symbols 2 stored, the communication inspection 1, the communication inspection 2, the number of times of production A to Z, the production selection state 0 to 2, the variation additional information, the design 1 production There are commands for pattern, symbol 2 effect pattern, symbol 1 character effect, symbol 2 character effect. The symbol 1 memory number command indicates the reserved memory number of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 memory number command indicates the reserved memory number of the second special symbol. The communication check 1 command and the communication check 2 command are for confirming whether or not normal communication is being performed. The various commands of the production times A to Z indicate the number of productions according to the above-described limited frequency table, and the various commands of the production selection states 0 to 2 indicate the types of production according to the limited frequency table. Is. The fluctuation additional information command indicates information for adding an element (effect component) for suggesting, for example, a big hit expectation degree in the effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Is. The symbol 1 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the second special symbol. is there.

  As a command for determining a special symbol, there are a symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and a symbol 2 effect pattern stop command. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the effect symbol 190 based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

  The commands for determining a special symbol include: 0 fluctuation time reduction (low probability), fluctuation time reduction times A to Z (low probability), 0 fluctuation time reduction (high probability), and probability fluctuation ( Command). These are for transmitting a command relating to the gaming state at that time, and are used for the production mode display, the short-time display, and the like.

  As the command for the big hit start demonstration, there are a symbol one big hit start demonstration, a symbol two big hit start demonstration, and a command for specifying a launch position. The symbol 1 jackpot start demo command and the symbol 2 jackpot start demo command are for displaying a start demo based on the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The launch position designation command is used to notify the launch position when the player is required to strike a game ball by so-called left-handed or right-handed.

  The commands for opening the jackpot medium / large prize winning opening include the commands of symbol 1 big hit middle demo 1-16 and symbol 2 big hit middle demo 1-16. These are for displaying effects based on the jackpot symbol and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  As a command at the time of closing the jackpot, the winning prize closing command is available. This is for displaying the special prize closing effect.

  As the command for the big hit end demo, there are an end demo per symbol 1 command and an end demo per symbol 2 command. These are for displaying a winning end demonstration effect based on the winning symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  As a command at the time of starting winning a prize, there are a command of winning notice (per notice notice effect), symbol notice (per symbol notice effect), change notice (pattern notice effect), symbol 1 memory number, symbol 2 memory number. Each command of the advance notice, the symbol notice, and the change notice is a command (prefetch command) related to the prefetch effect described above by the prior information notifying unit 157. The winning advance notice command is used to transmit a random number range of pass / fail random numbers, and includes information on pass / fail according to the lottery probability. The symbol advance command is for transmitting a random number range of symbol random numbers, and includes information related to the hit type. Furthermore, the change notice command is for transmitting a random number range of the change pattern, and can be used to specify the type of change pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.). The command for the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2 is for transmitting the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, as a result of the lottery determination, information such as the presence / absence of a pre-reading effect and a period is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 by each command of hitting notice, symbol notice, and change notice.

  As the command at the time of power interruption return, communication inspection 1, communication inspection 2, game state A to E for power interruption recovery, production times A to Z, production selection states 0 to 2, design 1 character production, design 2 character production, There are commands for the power failure return state, special symbol 1 state upon power interruption return, special symbol 2 state upon power interruption return, launch position designation, errors a to d, symbol 1 memory count, symbol 2 memory count.

  The commands of the communication inspection 1 and the communication inspection 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is being performed. The commands for the game states A to E for power interruption return are for transmitting different commands depending on the game state at the time of power interruption. The commands for the number of performances A to Z indicate the number of times related to the performance according to the above-described limited frequency table, and the commands for the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the types of effects according to the limited frequency table. is there. The symbol 1 character effect and the symbol 2 character effect command are for transmitting commands corresponding to the symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power interruption return state command is used to transmit a different command depending on whether or not a hit is being made. Commands for special symbol 1 state at power interruption return and special symbol 2 state at power interruption return are sent according to the status of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, such as waiting, changing, and hitting. Is for. The launch position designation command is for designating an appropriate launch position according to the situation as described above. Errors a to d are for transmitting the presence and type of error. The command for the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2 is for transmitting the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Main control processing of main board>

  Next, main control processing in the main board 102 of the pachinko gaming machine 10 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. Prior to the description, the terms “special electric accessory”, “condition device”, and “substantial action continuous operation device” used below will be described. Each of these represents a conceptual device in the control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and among these, the “special electric accessory” operates (opens) the big prize opening of the big prize opening device 90. Is. The “condition device” is activated when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, and the “actual accessory continuous actuating device” is to operate a special electric accessory continuously several times. It is something that can be done.

Further, the main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here is the power-on processing shown in FIG. 14 (also referred to as “control start processing” on the main board), the initial setting processing shown in FIG. 15, and FIG. The setting change process shown in FIG. 17, the game progress interruption process shown in FIG. 17, the (win / no-go) lottery determination process shown in FIG. 18, and the power-off process shown in FIG. 19 are executed on the main board 102.
<Power-on processing>

  The power-on process schematically shown in FIG. 14 is a control process that is started after a security check using the manufacturing code of the CPU 501 is performed by turning on the pachinko gaming machine 10. In this power-on process, an initial setting process (S101) is executed as shown in the figure. In the initial setting process (S101), a process related to the setting value is executed. The contents of the initial setting process (S101) will be described later.

  After the initial setting process (S101), it is determined whether or not the RWM clear button (RWM clear switch (544)) has been operated (S102). In S102, when the RWM clear button is operated (S102: YES), the RWM clear process (S103) is executed, and the RWM clear information is transmitted to the sub side (sub main board 301 side). (S4). Further, information indicating that the power is turned on normally (power-on normal information) is stored in the RWM (S105), and timer interruption is permitted (S106). By permitting this timer interrupt (S106), game progress interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this case) becomes possible. Further, various random numbers are updated every time the loop processing (circulation processing) is repeated (S107).

  Here, the random numbers updated in the random number update process (S107) include various initial value random numbers such as an initial value random number per normal symbol, a symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and a soft initial value random number per special symbol. Can do. In updating various random numbers, a 2-byte soft random number update process can be used as a common control module. The random number updated in the random number update process (S107) is the software random number described above. Depending on the type of random number, the software random number updated in the random number update process (S107), the hardware random number described above, It is also possible to generate a random value by the operation of

  If the RWM clear button has not been operated in S102 (S102: NO), it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the power is off normally is stored in the RWM (S111). If the information indicating that the power supply is normal is stored in the RWM (S111: YES), an RWM check is performed (S112), and it is determined whether or not the data in the RWM (data in a predetermined range) is normal. Performed (S113). If the data in the RWM is not normal in S113 (S113: YES), the process proceeds to RWM clear processing (S103).

If the information indicating that the power failure is normal is stored in the RWM in S111 (S111: NO), and if the data in the RWM is normal in S113 (S113: NO), the power is disconnected from the RWM. Data of various information commands at the time is acquired (S116). Further, the acquired various information command data is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 side (S117), the return setting of the solenoid is performed (S118), and the above-described S105 (a process for storing the power-on normal information in the RWM). Migrate to
<Initial setting process>

  Next, the above-described initial setting process (S101 in FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. In this initial setting process, the setting process of each port register is executed (S121), and it is determined whether or not a setting key has been inserted (S122). When the setting key is inserted (S22: YES), the setting value changing process (S126) is performed. This setting value changing process (S126) will be described later.

If the setting key is not inserted in S122 (S122: NO), the setting value information is read (read) (S123), and it is determined whether or not the setting value is abnormal (S124). . When the set value is not abnormal (S124: NO), the initial setting process is finished, but when the set value is abnormal (S124: YES), the setting value abnormality is notified (S128). Then, the set value abnormality information is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 side (S129), and then a loop state is entered.
<Setting value change processing>

  Next, the setting value changing process (S126 in FIG. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. In this setting value change process, the RWM in the setting value storage area is checked (S131), and it is determined whether or not the setting value information is abnormal (S132). If there is no abnormality in the set value information (S132: NO), it is determined whether there is an input of the RWM clear switch (S133). If there is an input of the RWM clear switch (S133: YES), the set value A set value corresponding to the information is displayed (S134).

  If there is an abnormality in the set value information in S132 (S132: YES), the set value is forcibly set, and a default value (here, “1”) is set in the set value information (S141). Then, after the set value forced setting information is transmitted to the sub main board 301 (S142), the set value is displayed (S133).

  After S134, it is determined whether or not a setting value changing operation has been performed (S135). If there is a changing operation (S135: YES), the setting value information at that time is incremented by 1 (S136). Further, it is determined whether or not the set value information has reached the set upper limit value (here, “6”) (S137). If the set value information has reached the upper limit value (S137: YES), the set value information at that time is set to “ 1 ”is set (S138). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting change has been completed (whether or not the setting key has been removed) (S139). If it has been completed (S139: YES), the setting value display is stopped (the display is erased in S140). And the set value changing process is terminated.

  If there is no change setting in S135 (S135: NO), the setting value setting addition process (S136) to the setting lower limit (here, “1”) setting process (S138) are not performed. Then, the process proceeds to a determination process (S139) as to whether or not the setting change has been completed. If the set value information does not reach the upper limit value in S137 (S137: NO), it is determined whether or not the setting change is completed without performing the setting lower limit value setting process (S138) in S137. Shifts to determination processing (S139). Furthermore, if the setting change is not completed in S139 (S139: NO), the process returns to the setting value display process in S134.

  If there is no input from the RWM clear switch in S133 (S133: NO), the set value corresponding to the set value information is displayed as in S134 (S146). Further, similarly to the above S139, it is determined whether or not the setting change has been completed (whether or not the setting key has been removed) (S147), and if it has been completed (S147: YES), the process proceeds to S139. The display of the set value is stopped (the display is deleted in S140), and the set value changing process is terminated. If the setting change is not completed in S147 (S147: NO), the process returns to the setting value display process in S136.

That is, if there is an input of the RWM clear switch in S133 (S133: YES), the set value is displayed (S134), and the process for changing the set value (S135 to S138, etc.) is performed. It becomes possible. However, if there is no input of the RWM clear switch in S133 (S133: NO), the setting value is displayed (S146), but the processing for changing the setting value as in S135 to S138 is performed. Is displayed in a state where it is not possible (this state may be referred to as a setting display mode).
<Game progress interrupt processing>

  Next, the game progress interruption process (FIG. 17) repeated for every timer interruption of a predetermined period is demonstrated. This game progress interrupt process (also referred to as “timer interrupt process” or the like) is omitted in the above description, but at a predetermined period (here, 4 ms period) based on the period information set in the power-on process (FIG. 14). Repeated. As shown in FIG. 17, in the game progress interrupt processing, setting of interrupt operation conditions (S41, S42), recursion of interrupt processing time monitoring means (S43), management of gaming machines (S45-S70), interrupt permission ( S71) is performed in order to return to the process before the game progress interruption occurs.

  Specifically, in the interrupt operation condition setting process (S41, S42), in order to clear the interrupt flag, the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41), and the interrupt operation condition setting is performed. The value is set in the control register corresponding to the predetermined input terminal (S42). Thereafter, the second recursion information is set (S43), and the second recursion information is further set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). As will be described later, the second recursion information is a condition for recurring and restarting the monitoring time of the interrupt processing time monitoring means together with the first recursion information set previously.

  In the management of gaming machines (S45 to S70), the following processing is executed in order to manage gaming machines. First, an input process (S45) is executed to monitor the input of a specific signal. What is monitored here is the various switches attached to the game board surface, the pan full switch, the open signal, the magnetic detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, the glass non-detection signal, and the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal It is.

  Subsequently, various random number update processing (S46) is executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Further, an initial value update type random number update process (S47) is executed to update the random numbers per ordinary symbol, the symbol random numbers per special symbol, and the soft random numbers per special symbol. Next, an initial value random number update process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. Further, in order to update the 2-byte timer, a timer subtraction process (S49) is executed, and in order to set an effective period of the second start winning opening 63, an effective period setting process (S50) of the second start opening is executed. .

  Further, a winning monitoring process (S 51) is executed to store the number of times a prize ball is paid out, create an output request for board external information, and send a command to be sent to the sub-board 104. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, a prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

  Next, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operating gate (operating port 68), a normal symbol operating gate monitoring process (S53) is executed to store a random number related to the normal symbol, and the normal symbol display device or the normal symbol is displayed. A normal symbol control process (S54) is executed in order to perform a process related to the electric accessory. Further, the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S55) is executed in order to monitor the normal symbol variation start. In addition, in order to monitor the winnings of the first starting winning port 62 and the second starting winning port 63 of the game ball, the starting port monitoring control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol is executed. In order to perform the process which concerns on the display part 71, a special symbol control process (S57) is performed. Subsequently, in order to perform the process related to the special electric accessory, the special electric accessory control process (S58) is executed, and in order to perform the process related to the effective period of the special winning opening, the special winning opening effective period setting process (S59). Is executed, and the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S60) is executed in order to monitor the fluctuation start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Next, anomaly detection processing (S61) is performed to monitor magnetism, disconnection / short circuit / power supply monitoring, radio wave monitoring, glass frame set / game board frame open / closed status monitoring, and paired glass monitoring Then, in order to detect an abnormality in the incoming ball passage time, an abnormal incoming passage time detection process (S62) is executed. In addition, in order to make a display request for the number of times that the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of the operation reserved balls of the normal symbol display device, and the number of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol display device, a game state display process (S63 ) And a handle state signal inspection process (S64) is executed in order to monitor the touch state (including the operation amount state) of the firing handle 20. In addition, special symbol display, normal symbol display, special symbol display device (70, 71) display of the number of active reserve balls, normal symbol display device display of the number of active reserve balls, game state display, special electric accessory LED output processing (S65) is executed in order to display the number of times of continuous operation and error display.

  Subsequently, a firing control signal output process (S66) is executed in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, and a test signal output process (S67) in order to create and output a signal to be output to the test apparatus. Execute. Further, in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid and the special winning opening (open) solenoid, the solenoid output process (S68) is executed, and the effect control command transmission process ( S69) is executed, and external information output processing (S70) is executed to output signals to external terminals (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

Thereafter, the interrupt permission (S71) is executed, and the control process returns to the return (RET). Then, using the remaining time until the next game interruption is executed, the above-described circulation processing (circulation processing repeated including the random number update processing in S7) of the power-on processing (FIG. 14) is executed. .
<< Handle state signal inspection process >>

In the above-described handle state signal inspection process (S64), in order to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20, the handle state is inspected, and if it is determined that the handle state has changed as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer Subtraction, update of the handle state, setting of the handle state monitoring timer, and a command transmission request for the handle state effect. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is no change in the handle state, a handle state monitoring timer is set. In the subtraction of the handle state monitoring timer, when it is determined that the handle timer is being subtracted, the subsequent processing relating to the handle state is not performed.
<Lottery determination process>

  Next, the aforementioned lottery determination process (also referred to as “lottery determination process”) will be described. This lottery determination process is a process of determining whether or not the winning is made using the probability data (a process of performing a big hit lottery determination). Further, the lottery determination process can be performed, for example, in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) in the above-described game progress interruption process (FIG. 17).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a lottery determination process related to the success / failure. In this lottery determination process, first, when proceeding to step S1022, the main CPU 501 sets 1 in a predetermined register (for example, C register) as winning number data, and proceeds to the next step S1024. In step S1024, the main CPU 501 sets 2 as the repetition count data, and proceeds to the next step S1025. In the winning number data, “1” indicates a big hit and “2” indicates a small hit.

  In step S1025, the main CPU 501 acquires probability data from the lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 501 designates the gaming state (whether it is the probability variation state or the normal probability state) and the probability data address according to the set value, and acquires the probability data corresponding to the designated address from the lottery table. And store it in the register. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1026.

  When the processing proceeds to step S1026, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not it is correct. Here, the main CPU 501 first stores a random value in the comparison register for lottery (for example, the DE register) for determination of success / failure acquired when winning at the start opening, and then acquired in step S1025. The value stored in the probability data is subtracted from the value of the comparison register to obtain a new value of the comparison register. In this way, the value of the comparison register is updated.

  In the next step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not it has been won. Here, by subtracting the probability data from the value of the comparison register (for example, the DE register), when the value of the DE register becomes smaller than “0” (when a carry occurs), “1” is set in the carry flag of the flag register. Set. That is, the carry flag is set. “Carry occurs” means that the carry flag is set to “1”. In step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the winning is made by determining whether or not “1” is set in the carry flag.

  Here, when “1” is not set in the carry flag, the main CPU 501 determines that it has not won (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028. On the other hand, when “1” is set in the carry flag, the main CPU 501 determines that it has been won (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the processing according to this flowchart. Here, the winning number data set in the case of “Yes” in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined by the lottery determination (for example, if the winning number is 1, the big win, if the winning number is 2, the small hit) It will be.

  In the next step S1028, the main CPU 501 updates the winning number data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 adds “1” to the value of the winning number data (for example, C register) to obtain a new winning number data (for example, C register) value. That is, the value of winning number data (for example, C register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1029.

  In step S1029, the main CPU 501 updates the repetition count data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 subtracts “1” from the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) to obtain a new value of the repetition count data (for example, B register). That is, the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1030.

  In step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) is “0”. Here, when the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) is “0”, it indicates that the repetition count has ended, and the repetition count data (for example, B register) is not “0” (“0”). Greater than) indicates that the number of repetitions has not ended. In step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether the value of the repetition number data (for example, the B register) is “0”.

  Here, when the value of the B register is “0”, the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033. On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not “0”, the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

  If “No” in step S1030, the determination in step S1026 is performed again using the same probability data as in the previous time. In the next step S1033, the main CPU 501 sets “00 (H)”, which is non-winning data, to the value of the winning number data (for example, C register), and ends the processing according to this flowchart.

  With the configuration described above, as described in step S1028, since the process for updating the winning number data is in the lottery determination process, it is not necessary to store the winning number data in the lottery table. Also, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, it is not necessary to repeatedly determine the same probability data in the lottery table, so that the amount of ROM used by the lottery table can be reduced.

In this example, one winning number corresponding to the small hit and big hit is provided, and the type of big hit or small hit is determined by the symbol random number acquired separately at the time of winning, but these types are determined by this processing. Is also possible. In that case, if the value of the repetition count data in step S1024 is changed according to the number of types and probability data for each winning number (range value corresponding to each winning number) is set, the same determination routine can be used. It is also possible.
<Power-off process>

  Next, a power-off process that is executed when a power-off occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the power-off process, the data of all the used registers is saved in the RWM (S81), and the interrupt enable / disable state before the power-off is saved (S82). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-on normal information is stored in the RWM (S83). If not stored (S83: NO), the power-off abnormality information is stored in the RWM (S84). The process proceeds to the RWM access prohibition process (S88). On the other hand, if it is stored (S83: YES), the value of the stack pointer is stored in the stack pointer buffer (S85), the information about normal power interruption is stored in the RWM (S86), and the RWM checksum is calculated. The checksum data is saved (S87). Then, access to the RWM is prohibited (S88), and the control process is looped and the CPU 501 is reset.

In this power-off process, even if both the first recursive information and the second recursive information described above have not been set, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursive means, and the first recursive information and the second recursive information Information is set, the monitoring time of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the time is recurred. Further, in the present embodiment, the forcible setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed immediately after the start of the power interruption process and at a timing before the process of saving all the used registers (S81). It has been broken. When the power supply is resumed, the control process is started in a state where the monitoring time is recursed. In other words, by forcibly recurring the monitoring timing when the power is cut off, the control processing can be prevented from proceeding without recurring monitoring timing in the control processing immediately after the power supply is resumed. It has become.
<Other individual control processing modes>
<< Control Mode Related to Command Transmission Timing >>

In the present embodiment, the effect control command output from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 is temporarily stored in the command buffer in response to a command request before transmission. The command buffer is obtained by causing a plurality of buffers to function as a ring buffer. In the control processing for command transmission (in this case, the production control command transmission processing (S69)), the command buffer is executed once in the order stored in the command buffer. In the game progress interruption process, one command (a pair of data of MODE and EVENT) is taken out from the command buffer and transmitted. It is also possible to adopt a method in which a command set with a high priority is transmitted first. In various control processes, when a command that needs to be transmitted is generated, it is possible to transmit the command as needed. When such a method is adopted, during one game progress interruption process, for example, an effect command is transmitted collectively in one control processing module such as an effect control command transmission process (S69). Instead, each time a command needs to be transmitted, command transmission is performed sequentially within each control processing module. For this reason, it is difficult for a situation in which command transmission is carried over to the next game progress interrupt process. For example, there is no delay in the command at the time of starting winning and the command transmission at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol, and quick command processing is possible.
<< Control mode related to update of pending storage >>

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the configuration in which the second game is prioritized is employed, and regularity is provided in the execution order of the first and second plurality of games. Are performed in order for each second game or each first game. Accordingly, if only the information stored on hold is updated for each second game or first game, the update of information stored on hold is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of prioritizing the first game or giving priority to any game, the reserved memory is digested in the order in which the start winnings are generated and stored (consumed in order of winning). It is also possible to adopt a configuration that does this. Among these, in the case of adopting the configuration in which the reserved memory is digested in the order in which the start winnings are generated, the reserved memory information is updated according to the digestion, the total number of pending games is updated, and the winning order is stored. As a result, the information stored on hold can be updated as a whole.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to notify the sub-main board 301 that the reserved memory has been updated, the symbol memory number command (symbol 1 memory number command or symbol 2 memory number command) is requested as described above. By including both the symbol 1 memory number command and the symbol 2 memory number command in one command, the necessary program and memory capacity can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to variation pattern lottery >>

  Next, various aspects related to the variation pattern lottery will be described. Any one of the variation pattern determination modes described here may be selected and applied in one pachinko gaming machine 10 or may be used in combination as appropriate. And when using a some aspect together, it is possible to use an aspect properly, for example based on elements, such as a success / failure result.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the determination of the variation pattern includes the result of success / failure, the number of reserved balls, a special symbol (which may be a symbol group), and a variation pattern selection state (special symbol status information). Although used as an element, a variation pattern table corresponding to a combination of these determining elements is selected. Along with the determination of the variation pattern table, the variation time associated with the variation pattern using the variation pattern random number is determined. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, regarding the determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern table is made different depending on whether the result of the success / failure lottery is a big hit or not. In other words, in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern table is selected from among the information associated with the status information of the special symbol such as the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (group), and the random number of success / failure. On the other hand, in the case of losing, the variation pattern table is selected from among those linked to them based on the gaming state, the special symbol, the number of reserved balls, and the random number. Of these, in the case of a big win, for the variation pattern that gives the re-lottery time in the production, the re-lottery time is given based on the production state (whether there is a specific production, etc.) and special symbols The presence / absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301.

  Further, when determining the variation pattern and the variation time, it is possible to determine additional variation information according to the determined variation pattern number, and to determine the subsequent variation time based on the additional variation information. For example, when the selected variation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern effect, it is conceivable that the extension of the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is determined afterwards.

  Further, as described above, by setting a command of variation additional information as a command at the time of starting the symbol variation of the special symbol, the sub-main board 301 has previously determined the variation determined in relation to factors such as the gaming state and the winning symbol. An effect of adding the additional time to the time later can be performed. And in this way, when determining the variation time of the overall production symbol, it is possible to create various variation patterns while keeping the number of variation patterns provided in advance as follows. It is. In other words, considering the case of performing the above-described pseudo continuous notice (so-called “pseudo sequence”), if the variation pattern of the pseudo sequence is simply set individually, the same number of variation patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. It is necessary to keep. When the production patterns such as the production symbols on the sub main board 301 are prepared for the fluctuation patterns determined on the main board 102 individually as described above, the total number of fluctuation patterns on the main board 102 is large. Thus, for example, it may be possible to reach a number exceeding 256. For this reason, in order to provide an identifiable code for a large number of variation patterns, it is necessary to increase the number of bits and the number of bytes for representing the code as compared with the conventional case.

  However, by using fluctuation additional information (fluctuation addition pattern), it is possible to connect the fluctuation additional information drawn by random numbers, for example, to a relatively small number of basic fluctuation patterns and form a fluctuation pattern afterwards. It is. As a result, a new variation pattern can be formed by combining the variation patterns, so that a variety of variation patterns can be created without excessively increasing the number of variation patterns provided in advance. Note that the random value related to the variation additional information can also be transmitted as a pre-reading effect command from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 when the start winning is generated. In addition, when the limited frequency pattern effect is executed, it is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variation addition pattern so that the variation addition information is easily added. In addition, to further give an example of using variation additional information, when “777”, which is a probable variation symbol, is displayed from the beginning as the combination of the production symbol 190, the variation additional information is not set and the combination of the production symbol 190 is used. Once “666”, which is a non-probable variable symbol, is displayed, an effect until the result of whether or not to promote it to “777” is displayed (for example, an effect of fluctuation fluctuation or development of a fluctuation mode). For example, an effect to express) is performed by setting variable additional information.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is determined using the number of reserved balls as an element, and the variation pattern table to be referenced differs depending on the number of reserved balls. The variation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0-4. The reason why the variation pattern table corresponding to the hold 4 is provided in addition to the four holds 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variation display is started from a situation where the number of held balls is four and the number of held balls is three. A state in which the number of reserved balls is 3 at the stage where the control process during the game progress interrupt process being executed at that time does not yet lead to the determination of the variation pattern which is the process during the subsequent game progress interrupt process When a new start win occurs, the number of reserved balls is added to 4 when the variation pattern is determined. Therefore, a fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can also be used as an element for determining the fluctuation pattern.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0-3. In this case, in the control processing, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the start winnings during the period from the number of reserved balls 3 to the determination of the variation pattern are not added. Note that any aspect can be applied to a pachinko gaming machine of a type in which a maximum number of reserves (for example, 8) other than four is set.

Further, the variation pattern random number acquisition timing can be the variation pattern lottery time. In other words, the fluctuation pattern random number is not a random number related to the operation of an accessory such as a special electric accessory. Therefore, as an element for performing an appropriate game, for example, when aiming for a fair game compared to a random number or the like The need to provide constraints is reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable that the fluctuation pattern random number is not acquired at the time of starting winning a prize, and for example, the fluctuation pattern random number is acquired and stored at the time of fluctuation pattern lottery as a separately provided timing. By doing so, the number of information to be stored at the time of starting winning a prize can be reduced, and the capacity of the program and memory can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to design designation >>

In the lottery of symbols, the symbol determination table to be used is determined based on the value of the upper byte of the code indicating the symbol random number, and then the symbol is determined from the determined symbol determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number. Is also possible. In this embodiment, since the numerical range of the design random number is set to “0 to 999”, the binary code code of these numerical values can be used. By doing so, the capacity of the memory and program can be reduced. In addition, the game status such as the number of rounds and the number of hours and hours is assigned to the winning symbol (which may be a symbol group), and the number of subsequent rounds, the number of times and the number of times, and the opening time of the big prize opening are determined according to the winning symbol. Or an open pattern may be determined. By doing so, it is not necessary to store and control data unique to the gaming state, and the capacity of the memory and program can be reduced. Furthermore, information (game state designation information) that conveys the game state to a command that conveys a symbol or the like from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 (for example, each command of the symbol 1 effect pattern and the symbol 2 effect pattern in this embodiment). ) Can also be added. This command is not sent to the sub-main board 301 immediately after being created, but is created and temporarily stored, and is sent to the sub-main board 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
<< Relationship between special design and production design variation time >>

  As described above, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the production symbol 190 corresponding to the special symbol are controlled to start and stop changing in synchronization with each other. Depending on the situation, the variation time of the effect symbol 190 can be shortened to some extent with respect to the variation time of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol).

  That is, when the change of the special symbol or the variation pattern is determined and the variation of the special symbol is started, an effect symbol change start command (command at the start of change) is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. However, the time required for transmission and reception of a predetermined command (for example, the first command at the start of fluctuation) and the command buffer (in this embodiment, the ring buffer type is used) are set and waited. Depending on the time until all the commands (first-in command) are sent out, it is conceivable that the start of variation of the effect symbol will be delayed from that of the special symbol. Further, at the time of stoppage of variation of the special symbol, a variation stop command (command for determining the symbol of the special symbol) is transmitted to the sub-main board 301. ) May be delayed due to the time required for transmission and reception and the degree of command buffer congestion (the number of commands waiting for transmission).

In this way, the variation time of the production symbol is set to some extent with respect to the variation time of the special symbol based on the command transmitted at the start of the variation, and the special symbol starts the next variation by performing fluctuation fluctuation The situation where the last symbol is stopped and displayed later is avoided. Although the display during fluctuation fluctuation may extend over the next fluctuation due to the processing delay depending on the number of commands, the amount of delay is less at the end of the fluctuation than the time at the start of fluctuation because there are fewer commands transmitted to the sub-main board 301. This makes it possible to almost reliably fix the production symbol during the display fixing time of the special symbol.
<< Pre-judgment of result of lottery >>

  First, in this embodiment, as described above (FIG. 9A, FIG. 12), the success / failure random value range in the first lottery and the second lottery is “0 to 65535”. 0 to 65535 "are divided into a plurality of random value ranges (A to N in this case) as shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the random number value range of “0 to 65535”, “0 to 205” belongs to the classification of the prefetching code A, and “206” is the classification of the prefetching code B. Belongs to. Further, the random number values “207” to “210” belong to the classification of the prefetch codes C to F, respectively. Further, the random number values “211 to 615” belong to the classification of the prefetch code G, and the random number values “616 to 618” belong to the classification of the prefetch code H.

  Subsequently, the random number values “619 to 621”, “622 to 624”, “625 to 627”, and “628 to 630” belong to the classification of the prefetch codes H to L, respectively. Also, the random number values “64874 to 65534” belong to the classification of the prefetch code M. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the random number values “631 to 64873” and “65534” belong to the classification of the prefetch code M.

  FIG. 13B shows the contents of each prefetch code. As shown in the figure, the pre-reading code A means that all settings are hit (big hit) regardless of the set value. Subsequently, the prefetch code B means that when the set value is “2” or more, it is a hit regardless of whether it is a normal time or a certain change time. In other words, the prefetch code B indicates a hit at both the normal probability and the high probability if the set value is “2” or more, but indicates a loss when the set value is “1”. Further, the pre-read codes C to F means that if the set value is “3” or more and “6”, it is a hit at both the normal time and the high probability regardless of the probability state.

  Subsequently, the pre-reading code G means that it is a win regardless of the set value as long as the probability change is in progress. That is, the prefetch code G indicates a hit when the probability is high, but indicates a loss at the normal probability. Further, the pre-reading code H means that if the probability change is in progress, it is a hit at a set value “2” or more. Further, the pre-read codes I to L mean that if the probability change is in progress, the set value “3” or more to “6” is a hit. Further, the prefetch code M means a small hit, and the prefetch code N means that the prefetch code N is out of place regardless of the set value or the probability state.

  Using the pre-read codes classified and grouped in this way, for example, the main board 102 determines a pre-read code to which the acquired random number value belongs, and information (command) corresponding to the determined pre-read code is used as the above-described prior notification information. It is possible to transmit to the sub main board 301. Then, on the side of the sub main board 301, it is possible to perform a hit notice effect as a pre-read effect in relation to the determination result of the success / failure without waiting for the suspension.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the determination based on the random value range is also applied to the pre-determination of the special symbol type and the pre-determination of the variation pattern type related to the special symbol as in the case of the result of the above lottery determination. To be done. And there are more types of special symbols and types of fluctuation patterns related to special symbols than the types of results of winning / failing lottery, and the number of look-ahead codes (number of groups) is also larger than in the case of winning / losing lottery. It has become. However, as a pre-determination method based on the random value range, the random value range and the types of lottery results to be grouped are different, but can be performed in the same manner as the pre-determination related to the above-described determination of success / failure. . Therefore, the detailed description about the prior determination based on the random value range for the symbol notice effect and the pattern notice effect is omitted here.

  By performing the prior determination based on such a random value range, it is possible to round the information, and it is possible to create a command related to the prior determination with a small amount of information. That is, when the number of random number values exceeds 256, the number of bytes necessary for expressing the random number value exceeds 1 byte. For this reason, if the information of the random number value is transmitted as it is (as raw information) to the sub-main board 301 for prior determination, information for identifying which random number is transmitted is transmitted by MODE, and the random number is There are cases where a command (MODE, EVENT) having a 2-byte structure has to be transmitted twice in order to notify a random value in order to store and transmit in EVENT.

  However, as in this embodiment, by converting the acquired random value into information indicating the range to which the random value belongs and transmitting it to the sub-main board 301, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced below the number of random values. Even when the number of numerical values exceeds 256 (1 byte), it is possible to convert the attribute of the acquired random number value into a command with an information amount of 1 byte. On the main board 102 side, a code indicating that fact (for example, indefinite or undecided) is provided in preparation for a situation where it is not desired to transmit prefetch information as will be described later. It is also possible to transmit a command indicating the code to the sub main board 301 side.

  Here, as the above-mentioned “situation in which it is not desired to transmit the prefetch information”, for example, when there is a hold on the priority digest side (eg, special figure 2 side) during the normal game in the priority digest type 1 + 1 type gaming machine, etc. Can be illustrated. In the “priority digestion type” in the above description, for example, as described above, one of the second game and the first game (here, the second game) has priority over the other (here, the first game). It means something like that. Furthermore, the “1 + 1 type gaming machine” in the above description means a gaming machine having a game characteristic in which a plurality of games (here, two) corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. Yes.

In addition, other “situations in which it is not desired to transmit prefetch information” include holding on the non-priority digestion side (for example, the special figure 1 side) of the specific game (high base) in the preferential digestion type 1 + 1 type gaming machine. The case where it generate | occur | produces can be mentioned. In addition, when a hold on the priority digest side (for example, the special figure 2 side) occurs during the normal game in the preferential digestion type 1 + 1 type gaming machine as described above, the pre-reading effect related to the special figure 1 side hold is executed. If it was in the middle, the pre-reading effect may be canceled (eg, when the reserved image in FIG. 1 is changed to red, it is returned to blue). If there is a hold on the non-priority digest side (eg, Special Figure 1 side) during a specific game (during high base), even if the pre-reading effect related to the special figure 2 side hold is in progress The production may not be stopped (for example, the reserved image in FIG. 2 that has been changed to red is maintained as it is). It should be noted that the touch effect described later is also set so that the touch effect is not executed when the pre-read effect is stopped, even if the effect related to the pre-read effect is scheduled. Become.
<Various ways to use touch detection>

  Next, a description will be given of a touch detection utilization measure related to an operation on the firing handle 20 that can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. Here, “touch detection” generally means that a touch of a human hand is detected by the touch switch 310 (FIG. 4) described above. The “touch detection” is an aspect related to the operation detection of the firing handle (20).

  In the present invention, as will be described later, various control elements (control content determination elements) are examined with respect to the relationship between touch detection and effect output, and appropriate control elements are adopted from the examined ones. It is assumed that it applies to Such various control elements are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 as appropriate, and an effect is executed based on the detection of the state of the gaming machine and the handle operation so that the detection detection of the launching handle can be effectively utilized. Is assumed.

  More specifically, in the present invention, the state of the pachinko gaming machine is played through a standby state before and after the power is turned on, and a special symbol change display and stop display (special It is a big win through the change display and the stop display (the symbol game related to the effect design) of the effect symbol (including the one displayed in a reduced scale) and the stop display (the symbol game related to the effect symbol) until the jackpot game ends. We regard it as a series of such states. Furthermore, in various states, the presence or absence of touch detection related to the firing handle 20 is assumed, and each state and situation are further subdivided to examine the presence and content of the production output.

  Then, depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states is used, whether or not an effect is output triggered by touch detection and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection is different. It is configured to get. Then, as will be described later, whether or not an effect is output triggered by touch detection, and / or an effect execution condition is set so that the effect output triggered by touch detection can be different. Is a game operation state among a plurality of types of game states, at which timing touch detection is performed, or before the timing of touch detection, an effect operation unit (operation buttons 22 and operation levers that can be operated by the player) It is assumed that conditions such as whether or not a player operation input means such as a cross key 96 has been operated are included.

  And what applied various examination matters to pachinko game machine 10 is grasped as each embodiment. Further, in the following examination, an effect performed based on touch detection (triggered by touch detection) is referred to as “touch effect”, but the term “touch effect” is related to touch detection in terms of control. It is a concept that includes those that are easily understood as touch effects and those that are difficult to understand. In addition to the touch detection, the “touch effect” may be performed as an effect (launch detection effect) executed in a situation where a change in the firing intensity volume is detected.

  Further, the control elements and assumptions considered here can be adopted by allowing the pachinko gaming machine 10 to coexist with those that can coexist in the control and appropriately select those that cannot coexist. In this way, touch output detection by examining production output and control processing related to this based on the combination of various states of gaming machines and presence / absence of touch detection, and selecting them appropriately and adopting them in pachinko gaming machines It is possible to perform the production output using the handle operation including the maximum possible variety, and the handle operation can be used more effectively.

Thus, in considering the utilization plan of touch detection, as shown in FIG. 22, elements can be considered because the relationship between touch detection and effect output is determined at the design stage. At the left end (front side) of the charts in FIGS. 22 and 23, “structure”, “game state of gaming machine”, “touch detection” are classified as control element classifications (examination item classifications) related to the relationship between touch detection and effect output. "Effects executed based on", "Other processing executed based on touch detection", "Production permission / regulation conditions", and "Other 1". Here, “the gaming state of the gaming machine” can also be referred to as “a gaming state that can occur in the gaming machine”, “a state that can occur in the gaming machine”, and the like.
<Structure>

  Among these, the “structure” classification item shown at the top of FIG. 22 is a classification based on the equipment configuration for touch detection and the equipment configuration that can be related to touch detection for control. As the classification of “structure”, it is possible to appropriately select and subdivide what is necessary for possible application measures, but here, as shown in the figure, “touch detection” and “production button” ". In FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, each item is given an alphabet or a symbol based on a combination of an alphabet and a number. In the example of FIG. 22, the symbol “A” is attached to the “structure” at the front, and “A1” and “A2” are respectively displayed in the “touch detection” and “effect button” shown below. The symbol is attached.

Among these, the “touch detection” of the symbol “A1” means a configuration required to detect the contact of a human hand such as a player. The item “A1: touch detection” may include the configuration of the touch switch 310 described above. Further, the item “A2: effect button” may include the above-described configuration of the operation button 22, the cross key 96, and the like.
<Game state of gaming machine>

Subsequently, as the item of “game state of gaming machine” in the next stage described above, “B: normal state” and “C: special state” can be broadly mentioned. These “B: normal state” and “C: special state” are both “B: normal state” and “B: normal state” in the “state before touch change” meaning the state before touch detection. It means “normal state” and “C: special state”.
<< B: Normal state (state before touch change) >>

  Furthermore, “B: normal state” can be divided into “B1: gaming standby state” and “B2: gaming state”. Among these, “B1: game standby state” means a state in which a game such as a special game that is performed according to a change in a special symbol which is a main game of the pachinko machine in the present embodiment and a result thereof is not performed. doing. In other words, for the sake of convenience, it is defined as a “game standby state” even when the electric chew release operation based on the above-described fluctuation of the normal symbol or the winning of the normal symbol is performed. In addition, “B1: game standby state” includes a state in which a customer waiting demonstration display is performed after a predetermined time has passed without touch detection. It can be referred to as a “standby demo” or the like. In addition, as the “customer waiting demo”, it is conceivable to provide a basic “normal demo” and a special “non-normal demo” compared to this “normal demo”.

  In addition, as shown in the drawing, “B1: Game standby A (normal demonstration display)”, “B12: Game standby B (design stopped)”, “B13: Game standby C” are shown in the figure. (Setting screen for production / audio, etc.) ”and“ B14: Game standby (power saving) ”. Among these, “B11: Game standby A (normal demonstration display)” means a basic standby state among the game standby states, and is a state in which the above-described “normal demonstration” display is performed.

  In addition, it is also possible to handle the game standby state in which the above-described variation of the normal symbol is executed separately from other game standby states. In this case, “B11: Game standby A (normal demonstration display” in the present embodiment). ) ”To“ B14: Game standby (power saving) ”further subdivided standby state (for example, B111: Game standby A state, normal symbol and electric chew are not activated, B112: Game standby A state normal symbol changes Middle, B113: Electric chew operation in the game standby A state may be defined.

  FIG. 33A shows an example of the effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of “B11: Game standby A (normal demonstration display)”. In FIG. 33 (a), the display of the name of the manufacturer / seller (SAMMY) of the gaming machine in the majority of the screen, and the message flow display (scroll display) in the lower message display area 364 that appears at the bottom of the screen. Has been done. The message display can be exemplified by a content such as “change to standby screen by touching the handle, and transition to a customization screen by turning on the effect button”. Hereinafter, the standby screen display in the state of “B11: Game standby A (normal demonstration display)” may be referred to as “standby screen A”. This “standby screen A” is displayed when the data in the RWM is not normal (S113: YES) and the process proceeds to the RWM clear process (S103) in S113 when the power is restored (when the power is turned on in FIG. 14). Is also displayed. In addition, as a game standby screen at this time, the character display such as “initialized” may be written together with the character display of “energized” in FIG. A dedicated standby screen corresponding to the above may be provided.

  When touch detection is performed in the situation shown in the example of FIG. 33A, for example, a touch effect as shown in FIG. 34A is performed, and a change in effect (touch change) based on the touch detection is performed. It is conceivable to generate. In the example of FIG. 34 (a), there is no change in the image display on the effect display device 60, but as shown with a speaker mark 376 and a lamp mark 377 on the right side of the drawing, Output is being done.

  Here, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp mark 377 shown in the drawing do not indicate that these marks 376 and 377 are displayed on the effect display device 60, but what is image display performed on the effect display device 60? Separately, it is for schematically showing that sound output from the speaker (21) and light output (lamp output) by a predetermined LED are performed. A speaker mark 376 shown in the upper part of the figure indicates that there is an audio output by a design image in which a note is emitted from the speaker. A lamp mark 377 shown in the middle part of the figure indicates that the light bulb is lit. This shows that the light output is performed by the design image.

  In addition, a lamp mark 377 indicated by parentheses in the lower part of the drawing indicates a display mode when the lamp output is not performed. The lower lamp mark 377 (with parentheses) can be used instead of the middle lamp mark 377 (without parentheses) when light output (lamp effect) as a touch effect is not performed. Note that the speaker mark 366 may be a mark that is not output. As the speaker mark when there is no sound output, for example, a design image of a speaker to which no musical note is added can be used.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the fact that the reach effect is being executed can be represented by a lamp mark 378 in the drawing. In this case, the characters “reach effect” and “touch notification LED” are shown in the figure, and one lamp mark 378 indicates the presence or absence of the reach effect, and the other lamp mark 377 indicates the presence or absence of the touch effect. Can be shown to distinguish.

  In addition, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp marks 377 and 378 described here can be used for explanation of the effect combination depending on the presence / absence of audio output or light output even in various game states described below. Is. In the following description, speaker marks 376 and lamp marks 377 and 378 are added to all the screen display examples, and the presence or absence of sound output or light output is not described, but if necessary, A speaker mark 376 and lamp marks 377 and 378 are added to indicate a production combination (production combination).

  Subsequently, in the above-mentioned “B12: Game standby B (design stopped)”, the display related to the special symbol (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) and the production is stopped (here, the fixed stop state), and the next fluctuation Is not performed (the suspension is not present in either FIG. 1 or 2), or when a predetermined condition is satisfied (details will be described later, for example, from the display of the standby screen A) This means a standby state after elapse of time. Then, it is possible to perform a control in such a manner that when “B12: game standby B (during symbol stop)” elapses for a predetermined period, the process proceeds to “B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” described above. .

  FIG. 33 (b) shows an example of the effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of “B12: Game standby B (during symbol stop)”. In the example of FIG. 33 (b), numerical symbols “3”, “3”, “1” are displayed as the symbol element effect symbols described above, and the heart symbol is each numeric symbol as the non-symbol element effect symbol. The effect symbols 190a to 190c are configured in combination. Hereinafter, the standby screen display in the state of “B12: Game standby B (during symbol stop)” may be referred to as “standby screen B”.

  In this “standby screen B”, for the decorative design (effect design), the design (here, heart) is displayed, but the numbers (here, 1 and 3) may be hidden. Also, a number may be displayed when the change start condition is satisfied (= start screen winning from standby screen B).

  Further, in the lower right of the display area 194, the display corresponding to the display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c can be reduced inconspicuous and simplified, and can be performed together with the display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c. A reduced effect symbol display area 361 appears. Further, on the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197, a star design hold display is performed. When touch detection is performed in the situation shown in the example of FIG. 33B, for example, the touch effect area 362 on which “Welcome” is displayed as shown in FIG. 34B may appear. Is possible. And it is possible to give a change to production output triggered by touch detection.

  The above-mentioned effect symbols 190a to 190c (decorative symbols), the reduced effect symbol display area 361, and the number-of-holds display unit (196, 197) are provided with display priority. Here, the priority of display is, from the highest order, the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the number-of-holds display section (196, 197), and the effect symbols 190a to 190c. However, the display priority may be changed according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. For example, when the state is changing (during a game), the priority of display is high in the order of the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the number-of-holds display unit (196, 197), and the effect symbols 190a to 190c. In some cases, it may be configured such that the display priority is higher in the order of the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the effect symbols 190a to 190c, and the number-of-holds display unit (196, 197). When a touch effect that causes the touch effect region 362 to appear during symbol variation is executed, at least one display priority of the effect symbols 190a to 190c and the reduced effect symbol display region 361 is higher than that of the touch effect. Is set to be higher.

  In addition, on the standby screen B, the first hold number display unit 196 may be displayed without displaying the second hold number display unit 197 out of the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197. Is possible. In this case, it is also possible to move the first hold number display unit 196 to the left and right center portion at the lower part of the screen, for example. However, in this case, the standby screen B can be shifted only in the normal probability (low probability) state, and in a specific gaming state such as during probability change or during electric support, a start winning is detected for a predetermined time. It is desirable that it does not migrate even if it is not.

  Note that the standby screen B, which is the “variable standby screen”, is not limited to that shown in FIG. 33B, and various types of screens can be employed. Various touch effects can also be employed. For example, a lower message display area 364 exemplified in the standby screen A of FIG. 33A can be displayed.

  Further, as another example of the touch effect on the standby screen B, for example, an effect (RTC related effect) that is performed based on real time using an RTC (real time clock) can be exemplified. The RTC-related effects include, for example, effects performed by determining the due date and season, effects performed by determining the time zone of the day, effects performed simultaneously by a plurality of pachinko machines, etc. can do. Furthermore, the effect etc. which show that the time slot | zone at that time is in the specific effect mode by the scroll display of a character message can be illustrated. Further, a predetermined BGM can be output as an effect related to the RTC for standby.

  Moreover, what used the above-mentioned movable effect member as another example which concerns on the touch effect of the standby screen B can be mentioned. Specifically, it is assumed that the movable effect member is displaced from the initial position and reaches the post-drive position during the game standby on which the standby screen B is displayed. Further, the movable effect member has a relatively small overlap portion with the display area (194) of the effect display device (60) at the initial position, and a relatively large overlap portion with the display area (194) at the post-drive position. Shall be. Then, the movable effect member may be in a post-drive position, and the accessory may be returned to the initial position by detecting a change in touch detection there. In addition, even if the symbol variation starts during the return to the initial position at that time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the return operation of the accessory is not interrupted.

  The above-mentioned “B13: Game standby C (effect / sound setting screen)” indicates, for example, a standby state in which the player has made settings (environment settings) such as the effect mode, volume, and light quantity before the game is started. I mean. In this case, an environment setting menu (customization menu) is displayed, and it is possible to shift to an environment setting screen (environment setting display) of the selected type.

  FIG. 33 (c) shows an example of the effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of “B13: Game standby C (effect / sound setting screen)”. In the example of FIG. 33 (c), display indicating that the environment setting is possible and the customization mode is entered (in this case, display in the upper left corner area) is performed. Furthermore, from the top, menus of power saving mode on / off, RTC (real time clock) effect on / off, volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, effect frequency adjustment, and customization mode end are arranged in this order.

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 33 (c), the volume adjustment is performed using a volume adjustment meter configured by a plurality of (in this case, nine) rectangular marks arranged between the characters “small” and “large”. The player can do it while watching. Then, the volume is represented by the number of the reversely displayed rectangular marks in the volume adjustment meter.

  In the example of FIG. 33C, the light amount adjustment (may be brightness adjustment) is performed by a plurality of (here, five) rectangular marks arranged between the characters “low” and “high”. The player can perform the constructed light quantity adjustment meter while watching the player. Furthermore, the player can also adjust the production frequency while watching the production frequency adjustment meter configured by a plurality of (in this case, 9) rectangular marks between the characters “low” and “high”. It has become. The light quantity and the production frequency are represented by the number of the reversely displayed rectangular marks in each adjustment meter.

  In addition, an operation guidance display area 363 that indicates that the cursor movement by the cross key (96) and the determination operation by the operation button (22) can be performed appears. Also, in the lower message display area 364, a message flow display of “Move the cursor to“ End customizing mode ”to end” is displayed.

  Here, the transition to such a state in which the environment can be set is to be performed when, for example, an effect button (such as the operation button 22) is operated in the state of the standby screen A illustrated in FIG. Can do. In the following, the screen display in the state of “B13: Game standby C (effect / voice setting screen)” will be referred to as “display screen C”, “effect setting screen C”, “environment setting screen”, “customize screen”, etc. Sometimes called. In the present embodiment, the state in which the “display screen C” is displayed is one aspect of a plurality of game standby states.

  As the touch effect in the state of the “display screen C”, for example, it is conceivable to perform a sound output such as “Do your best” without changing the screen display. In this way, the effect of touch effects on environment settings can be minimized by performing touch effects with audio output, which is another effect element, without changing the screen display. It is possible to prevent such an obstacle. As a result, it is possible for the player to quickly and accurately set the environment while diversifying touch effects. It is also conceivable to combine touch effects with a predetermined light output.

  Although it is possible to perform a touch effect by screen display, a suppressed display mode (small, thin, so as to prevent an unexpected impression to the player by combination with the environment setting) It is considered desirable to perform a touch effect by image display in a display mode such as inconspicuous.

  The above-mentioned “B14: Game standby (power saving)” means a standby state while a process for power saving is being executed. As a process for power saving, in the example of “display screen C” in FIG. 33C, it is possible to shift to a state where the power saving mode can be entered. In “B14: Game standby (power saving)”, for example, an effect output in a mode of displaying characters “power saving” on a black background can be exemplified.

  As the touch effect in the state of “B14: Game standby (power saving)”, for example, the state control during power saving is canceled and the state of “B14: Game standby (power saving)” is changed to another state (“standby screen”). It is conceivable to shift to the production related to the state “B”. Further, it is conceivable that a touch effect is further executed in the previous state (the state of “standby screen B”).

  The above-mentioned “B2: gaming state” may include the items “B21: symbol variation state” and “B22: winning state”. Among these, “B21: symbol variation state” can be a state in which the display relating to the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) and the production is fluctuating. Examples of the effect output related to “B21: symbol variation state” include those in which all the effect symbols 190a to 190b are changing as shown in FIG. 8A, and those shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B. In this way, some of the effect symbols (190a, 190c) are in a stopped (temporary stop) state and the other effect symbols 190b are in a fluctuating state.

  Here, FIG. 37 (a) shows a state where normal reach has occurred, and FIG. 37 (b) shows a state where SP (super or special) reach has occurred. Also, in the SP reach screen shown in FIG. 37 (b), the left and right effect symbols 190a and 190c are moved and reduced to the upper left and upper right portions of the screen, a predetermined character appears, and the reduced effect symbol display is displayed. A notice image by the sun mark 381 appears at the upper part of the region 361 at the lower part of the right end of the screen. The sun mark 381 in the example of FIG. 37 (b) is displayed as the image object of the variation information display 198 in FIG. 37 (a) moving and changing its form.

  Examples of the touch effect during the normal reach shown in FIG. 37A include those shown in order in FIGS. 40A and 40B. That is, before touch detection, as shown by a speaker mark 376 that emits a note in FIG. 40A and a lit lamp mark 378, a reach effect by image display and a reach sound output are performed.

  When touch detection is detected, as shown by a speaker mark 376 in FIG. 40B, in addition to a reach sound, a sound output (touch sound output) indicating that the touch is turned on is performed as a sound output. . Examples of the touch sound include an audio output having a content such as “not likely to be expected” that indicates the reliability level of reach fluctuation during execution. Further, as shown in a state where the lamp mark 377 related to the touch notification LED is turned on, the light output for the touch effect is performed.

  Subsequently, as the touch effect during the SP reach shown in FIG. 37 (b), for example, the player releases his / her hand from the firing handle (20), and the state change (touch detection “ An example in which a character utters a predetermined line (sentence) when a state change from “present” to “absent” is detected can be exemplified. In the example of FIG. 37 (b), a balloon area 382 appears and the characters “Hot!” Are displayed. Furthermore, this touch effect is executed as a highly reliable effect that suggests that the degree of expectation related to the development of a big hit or reach is relatively high, and it is easy to appear in the case of a big hit.

  Further, during SP reach, when the player once releases the firing handle 20 and then grips the firing handle 20 again, a touch such as “Hot!” Character display shown in FIG. It is also possible to execute a production. In this case, it can be said that a touch effect is executed when a state change from “none” to “present” is detected.

  Further, “B22: hitting state” can be a state in which a hit such as a big hit occurs and a game related to the hit is being executed. More specifically, “B22: hitting state” is, for example, after displaying a jackpot start demonstration for notifying that a jackpot game is started, and then through a game with a big winning opening, This can be done until the performance of the big hit end demo is finished.

  Examples of the effect output related to “B22: hitting state” include those shown in FIG. 37 (c) to FIG. 39. For example, FIG. 38A shows a screen display example at the time of a big hit start demonstration. At the time of the big hit start demonstration, the characters “BONUS” indicating the occurrence of the big hit and the predetermined characters are displayed in the center of the screen, and the symbol combination related to the generated big hit (here, “333” is displayed in the reduced effect symbol display area 361. ]) Is displayed. Further, in the example of FIG. 38 (a), a number-of-holds display area 367 showing the number of holds in the special figures 1 and 2 is shown. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 38 (a), as described above, the right-handed guidance display area 383 is displayed as an effect to prompt the player to make a right-hand strike. In the right-handed guidance display area 383, “turn the handle to the right”. Message is displayed.

  Here, regarding the above-described reduced effect design display area 361, during the change of the decorative design (effect designs 190a to 190c), the variable display by the reduced decorative design (reference number omitted) is also performed in the reduced effect design display area 361. However, it is possible to prevent the reduced decorative symbols (mini symbols) in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 from reaching the reach state even if the decorative symbols (effect symbols 190a to 190c) are in the reach state. Furthermore, in this case, the three reduced decorative symbols in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 can only be displayed in any one of the display modes of changing all or stopping. It is.

  Further, the reduced decorative symbols in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 should be displayed during a big hit (here, a period including all from the big hit start demo to the big hit end demo) or during the normal demo display (in the standby screen A). Is possible. When a reduced decorative symbol is displayed during the jackpot, it is possible to display a reduced decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol that triggered the jackpot (for example, the same combination). Further, when displaying a reduced decorative symbol during the normal demonstration display, a reduced decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbols (effects symbols 190a to 190c) that have been stopped when shifting to the normal demo display is displayed. It is possible.

  FIG. 38 (b) shows an example of the in-round screen displayed during the big hit game. In the example of FIG. 38 (b), as described above, the story development in which a predetermined character appears is displayed in the center of the screen, and in the lower part of the screen, in addition to the reduced effect symbol display area 361 and the reserved number display area 367, In addition, a round number display area 368 and a count number display area 369 are displayed.

  38 (c) and 39 (a) to 39 (c) exemplify the hit specific effect screens A to D, which are the specific effect outputs being hit, as described above. Among these, the hit-specific specific effect screen A shown in FIG. 38 (c) is an effect to be executed in the seventh round of the big hit game, and the overall image of the big hit that occurred from the seventh round to the eighth round is shown. The effect which suggests or alert | reports (whether a probability change game is provided after a big hit, etc.) is performed.

  On the hit effect specific effect screen A, images of answer sheets in the tests of two characters “Kamizuki Rin” and “Mizuki Minazuki” are displayed. Furthermore, the character “65” is displayed as the test score for “Character Kannazuki”, one of the characters, but the test score is still displayed for “Haruka Minazuki”, the other character. It has not been done. In this way, when the score of “Haruka Minazuki” is not yet displayed, the overall image of the jackpot that occurred (for example, whether or not a probability-changing game is awarded after the jackpot) has been communicated to the player. In other words, it is unclear whether the player can play the game in a relatively advantageous state.

  When touch detection is performed during this round (here, 7 rounds), in the example of FIG. 39A, “100” is displayed as the score of “Mizuki Minazuki” test triggered by touch detection. (A hit effect specific screen B). As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the state where “100” is displayed as the score of “Mizuki Minazuki” test is a state in which the player is expected to play a game in a relatively advantageous state. It has become. That is, in the example of FIG. 39A, a touch effect accompanying the touch detection (an effect in which a score of “100” appears) is performed, thereby producing an effect that expects a gaming state advantageous to the player. Has been.

  In contrast to this production, if a numerical value exceeding the score of “Kannazuki Rin” (“65” in this case) is not displayed as the score of “Mizuki Mutsuharu” test, a resurgence performance is performed after that. Unless otherwise, the player is informed that a game in a relatively advantageous state cannot be performed. Further, when there is no change in touch detection, the score of the “Mizuki Minazuki” test is not displayed in the round. It is also possible to express the score of “Haruka Minazuki” when the player once releases the firing handle (20) to change the touch detection from “present” to “absent”. In addition, after changing the touch detection from “Yes” to “No”, the firing handle (20) is further gripped to return to the touch detection “Yes” state, and the score of “Mizuki Minaharu” is displayed. It is also possible to make it.

  Subsequently, when the big hit game of the seventh round is finished, the hit-specific specific effect screen C shown in FIG. 39B is displayed, and an effect indicating that the eighth round is shifted to is executed. In the example of FIG. 39 (b), the number of rounds of the next jackpot game is notified by the display of “Round 8” during the production showing the story development. As described above, these productions are “productions in which the player is expected to play a game in a relatively advantageous state”, but this relatively advantageous state and disadvantageous state include a big hit. As the gaming state to be transferred after the game is finished, there are “advantageous state: probable change state / disadvantageous state: non-probable change state”, “advantageous state: electric support state / disadvantageous state: non-electricity support state”, and the like.

  In addition to the role of suggesting such an advantageous state, the role of suggesting the number of expected winning balls that can be obtained in the current big hit game may be suggested. In other words, if the score is “100”, the jackpot round is 10 rounds, and if the score is “65” or less, the jackpot round may be 8 rounds.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a role which suggests whether the pending | holding consecutive resort is performed (= whether there is a big hit hold in the hold put on hold during the big hit). In other words, if the score notation of “100” indicates that the reserved resort in the hold is performed, and if the score notation of “65” or less indicates that the reserved resort in the reservation is not performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 39C shows an example of effect display in the eighth round. In the example shown in FIG. 39 (c), the score of “Kannazuki Rin” is “65”, and the score of “Haruka Minazuki” is “100”. This display mode indicates that the player can play in a relatively advantageous state. Note that in the eighth round, unlike the effect in the seventh round, regardless of whether there is a change in touch detection, a big picture of the big hit (for example, whether or not a probability variation game is given after the big hit) is suggested. The display mode will be shown. In this way, by changing the touch detection in the seventh round, it is suggested in advance the big picture of the big hit (for example, whether or not the probability variation game is given after the big hit) than when the touch detection is not changed. Thus, it is possible to provide a new gameability during a big hit, in which game information can be quickly known by a player's handle operation (whether touch detection is performed).

When the jackpot game with the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot ends, the jackpot end demo screen as shown in FIG. 37 (c) is displayed. Then, when shifting from the big hit game state to the subsequent game state, the display of the big hit end demonstration screen is finished, and the display shifts to the effect display in a mode corresponding to the subsequent game state.
<< C: Special state (state before touch change) >>

  As the above-mentioned “C: special state”, “C1: power interruption state”, “C2: power interruption return state”, “C3: setting change (probability change) state”, “C4: setting display (1-6) ) Medium state ”. Among these, “C1: power-off state” means a state in which the power supply is cut off due to a drop in the voltage supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 (here, the main board 102 in particular).

  Furthermore, items of “C1B1: gaming standby state (normal demonstration display)” and “C1B12: gaming state” can be provided in the “C1: power interruption state”. Among these, “C1B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)” can be considered as the same as “B1: game standby state” described above.

  Specifically, for “C1B1: Game standby state (normal demonstration display)”, “B11: Game standby A (normal demonstration display)” and “B12: Game standby B (design stop) in“ B1: Game standby state ” “B):“ B13: Game standby (power saving setting screen) ”,“ B14: Game standby (power saving) ”, and so on. Here, in order to prevent the diagram from becoming complicated, illustration of subdivided items regarding “C1B1: gaming standby state (normal demonstration display)” is omitted.

  The aforementioned “C1B12: in-game state” can be considered as the same as “B2: in-game state” described above. Specifically, “C1B12: gaming state” can also be classified into items such as “B21: symbol variation state” and “B22: winning state” in “B2: gaming state”. . Here, in order to prevent the diagram from becoming complicated, illustration of items subdivided for “C1B12: in-game state” is omitted. In the various states related to “C: special state” described here, various types of operations are performed until touch detection or until a predetermined condition (e.g., time elapses) is established after touch detection. The touch effect is not executed.

  The above-mentioned “C2: power interruption return state” means a state where the voltage supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 (in particular, the main board 102 in this case) is recovered and the power interruption is eliminated. The items “C2B1: gaming standby state (normal demonstration display)” and “C2B2: gaming state” similar to the above-mentioned “C1: power interruption state” and “C2B2: state during gaming” may also be provided in this “C2: power interruption return state”. it can.

  FIG. 35A shows an example of an effect output related to the state of “C2B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”. In FIG. 35 (a), the power interruption return notification area 365 appears in the upper right corner of the display content (standby screen A) in “B11: Game standby A (normal demonstration display)” described above. "Is displayed.

  FIG. 35B shows a display example according to the state of “C2B2: in-game state”. In the example of FIG. 35 (b), a central message display area 371 appears in the center of the image where the display area of the production symbols (190a to 190c) appears, and “Energized. The design is currently changing. The message “You can play” is displayed in three stages. That is, in the example of FIG. 35 (b), the power is cut off during the symbol variation, and then the power is restored without the RWM clear operation (the power is restored), and the effect symbols (190a to 190c) are displayed. The screen display in a state where the display area is displayed shows a state where the message display related to energization is added and the screen display is resumed.

  As the effect output mode after this, in accordance with the information content conveyed by the command at the time of power interruption recovery as described above, the effect display (190a to 190c) is resumed from the variable display, and a predetermined stop pattern is used. Various modes can be adopted such as restarting from the stop display of the effect symbols (190a to 190c).

  Here, the touch effect in the state related to the power interruption recovery is not performed until the initialization notification performed when the power is turned on is completed even if the touch is detected. By doing in this way, it can prevent that a touch effect functions as what causes misunderstanding to a game hall store clerk or a player with respect to initialization alerting | reporting, for example. An example of the initialization notification when the power is turned on is to display the text “Power is being turned on. Please wait.”

  The aforementioned “C3: setting change (probability change) in progress state” means that the setting change is in progress with respect to the setting change described above. The above-mentioned “C4: state during setting display (1-6)” means a state in which the numerical value of the set value changed by the setting change operation is being displayed. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the setting value changes in the range of 1 to 6, and the setting display 701 displays a numerical value corresponding to the setting value.

  Examples of performance output related to “C3: setting change (probability change) in progress” are the characters “setting is being changed” and “settings are being displayed” as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 36 (c). The display can be exemplified. In the effect output example of FIG. 36 (b), the message “Setting is being changed. After changing the setting, the game will shift to the normal game when the frame door is closed” is displayed in the lower message display area 364. . In the effect output example of FIG. 36 (c), a lower center message display area 370 appears in the lower center of the screen, and in the center, “setting is being changed. Message is displayed.

  “Setting change” here means that the current setting value is displayed and the setting can be changed. “Setting display” indicates that the current setting value is displayed. This means that the settings cannot be changed. More specifically, in “setting display”, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder (809) and the setting value at that time is displayed on the setting indicator (807). Is in a state where it cannot be processed. This corresponds to the processing when it is determined that the RWM clear switch has not been input (S133: NO) in the setting change processing shown in FIG.

Note that the touch effect by the image is not executed in any state of “setting change” and “setting display”. In this embodiment, an image indicating the state is displayed during the state, but no image may be displayed.
<Production performed based on touch detection>

Subsequently, as the item of “the effect executed based on the touch detection”, “D: content of touch effect” and “E: selection criteria for touch effect” can be mentioned. Among these, “D: content of touch effect” is provided with an item indicating how the effect related to the touch operation (touch effect) is performed via what kind of device. In addition, in “E: Selection criteria for touch effects”, an item indicating items on which a plurality of various touch effects are selected is provided.
<< D: Contents of touch production >>

  The above-mentioned “D: content of touch effect” can be divided into, for example, “D1: effect output destination”, “D2: effect data”, and “D3: only change state”. Further, among these, “D1: production output destination” may include “D11: speaker”, “D12: lamp”, and “D13: image display device”. “D11: speaker” can be the one using the above-described speaker 21, and “D12: lamp” can be one using various LEDs for production. In addition, although the output destination of a touch effect is enumerated here, the point of which output destination is used in what combination in each state of a gaming machine is mentioned later.

  Further, “D13: Image display device” may be an effect display device 60 (including a case where a plurality of display bodies are used). Furthermore, for “D13: image display device”, items “D131: same as decorative symbol display device” and “D132: different from decorative symbol display device” can be provided.

  Among these, “D131: Same as decorative symbol display device” provides a touch effect by an image using the same display device as the effect display device 60 that displays the above-described effect symbol 190 (FIGS. 8A and 8B). Means to do. It can be said that the effect output accompanying touch detection as shown in FIG. 34 (b) belongs to the category of “D131: Same as decorative symbol display device”. Further, “D132: separate from decorative design display device” is a display device provided separately from the effect display device 60 (for example, a second liquid crystal display device or an LED display device such as that provided in a frame) It means that a touch effect is performed using abbreviations).

  Regarding “D2: production data” described above, items “D21: shared with others” and “D22: dedicated” can be provided. Among these, “D21: Shared with other effects” means sharing effect data for touch effects with effect data for effects other than touch effects. “D22: Dedicated” means that the effect data for the touch effect is dedicated and is not shared with the effect data for effects other than the touch effect.

  Here, “shared with effect data” may include an aspect in which some effect data is shared and other effect data is not shared. In addition, the production data structure and production mode are also adopted, in which part of production data for touch production is shared with production data for other productions, and other production data for touch production is dedicated. Is possible.

  For example, the character display of “Welcome” in the touch effect area 362 illustrated in FIG. 34B can be considered to use effect data dedicated to the touch effect. Further, for example, when image data that is used even during symbol variation is also used as a touch effect, it can be considered that the effect data is shared.

The above-mentioned “D3: Only change the state” means that, for example, when a touch is detected, only the effect mode is changed, and an effect mode that does not perform a dedicated effect as a touch effect, or an appearance frequency as a touch effect. It is possible to exemplify a production mode in which a few so-called rare characters and scenes do not appear. And such “D3: only change state” can be said to be an example of an effect mode in which “D2: effect data” is “D21: shared with other things”.
<< E: Selection criteria for touch production >>

  Next, the above-mentioned “E: Selection standard for touch effects” will be described. This “E: selection criteria for touch effects” is, in other words, a criterion for selecting what kind of touch effects are to be executed, and in a broad sense includes whether or not to perform touch effects. Such “E: selection criteria for touch effects” can be divided into, for example, “E1: gaming state (at touch timing)”, “E2: number of operations”, and “E3: customization setting”. it can. Among these, “E1: gaming state (at touch timing)” means an effect mode in which touch effects to be selected or selected differ depending on the game state when touch detection is made. Yes.

  Examples of the “E1: gaming state (at touch timing)” may include “E11: gaming state related to playing ball” and “E12: gaming state not related to playing ball”. Furthermore, as “E12: gaming state not related to play”, “E121: RTC”, “E122: Demo type (B1 type)”, “E123: Abnormal / error state”, “E124: Production button Can be exemplified.

  Here, it can be said that the above-mentioned “E11: gaming state related to the game” is one of the states obtained by subdividing the above-mentioned “B2: gaming state” (FIG. 22). Specifically, “B2: gaming state” includes the items “B21: symbol variation state” and “B22: hitting state” as described above. A gaming state in which more balls are played than usual is included, such as a probability state and an electric support state.

  “E121: RTC” related to “E12: Game state not related to game play” described above is to select whether or not to perform the touch effect and the content of the touch effect based on the RTC (real time clock) that measures the real time. For example, if it is determined that the touch detection has changed at a timing when the RTC time measurement result is in a predetermined time zone, the touch effect corresponding to the time measurement result is determined. ing. In addition, “E122: Demo type (B1 type)” indicates which of the various demo types (B11 to B14) in the “B1: Game standby state” described above is in a situation where a demo is performed. This means an effect mode in which a touch effect is determined.

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned “E123: Abnormality / error state” means what happens when a state that is difficult to consider normally occurs or when an abnormality or error is detected when touch detection is performed. This means an effect mode in which a touch effect is selected depending on whether an abnormality or an error has occurred. Furthermore, as “E123: abnormal / error state”, “E1231: in the touched state since power-on” or “E1232: in the non-touched state”, for example, which is difficult to consider, A state that cannot be assumed can be defined as a parameter for selection criteria. In the “state where no winnings can be assumed”, touch detection is performed between the starting point and the starting timing after the starting point, starting from a predetermined time after the power is turned on and a predetermined time when the standby screen is displayed. The situation that is not possible can be illustrated.

  Furthermore, in consideration of maintenance of the gaming machine, the game shop clerk opens the glass door (15) and manually wins directly at the start winning opening (62 or 63) without operating the firing handle (20). There is. Even in such a case, a command is transmitted from the main board (102) to the sub-main board (301), and an effect is executed in the same way as a normal game is being played. If touch detection is performed during the symbol variation display, an effect corresponding to the state is output. It can be said that such a state is also included in the above-mentioned “state in which no winning can be assumed”.

  The above-mentioned “E1231: In the case of the touch state from the time of turning on the power” means a situation where the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on while touching the touch sensor (touch switch 310). In such a situation, even if there is a contact with the launch handle (20) before the power is turned on, the touch detection is not continued due to the power interruption before the power is turned on. Can be avoided. Alternatively, since such a situation can be considered as an abnormal power-on situation, it is also possible to perform an effect output for notifying that the power supply is not normal.

  In addition, in “E1232: When a ball is entered in a non-touch state”, a ball entering one of the entrances (winning entrances) is detected in a state where contact with the touch sensor (touch switch 310) is not detected. Means the situation. For example, as such a situation, it is possible to consider a case where there is a fraud involving power-on. In such a situation, it is conceivable to perform an effect output for notifying that the power supply is not normal.

  The above-mentioned “E124: Operation of the effect button” means a situation where the operation button 22 is operated and further touch detection is performed. For example, the type of the touch effect (the effect executed based on the touch detection) is determined depending on whether or not the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is operated before the touch effect is executed (within a predetermined period before being executed). And a control mode in which the presence or absence of execution is determined.

  More specifically, when an effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is not operated within a predetermined period (several seconds before) before touch detection, the touch effect by image or sound is executed, and the effect button (operation button) 22 etc.) is operated, the thing which performs a touch effect only with an audio | voice or does not perform a touch effect can be illustrated.

  The aforementioned “E2: number of operations” means an effect mode in which a touch effect is selected based on an operation when the touch operation is repeated a plurality of times within a predetermined period. Furthermore, “E3: customization setting” means an effect mode in which a touch effect is selected based on the content of customization performed by the environment setting described above.

As described above, with respect to the “effects executed based on touch detection”, when various processes are executed based on touch detection, a prize ball is paid out or a symbol game (a special symbol or a decorative symbol is displayed as a stop result). It is considered that it is preferable not to affect the progress itself of the game that gives a profit based on the game itself.
<Other processing executed based on touch detection>

Subsequently, the items of “other processing executed based on touch detection” described above are roughly “F: change of effect state”, “G: change of effect”, “H: trigger parameter of touch effect”. Can be mentioned.
<< E: Selection criteria for touch production >>

Among these, “F: change in effect state” can be defined based on touch detection as “F1: change in effect state” or “F2: not change in effect state”. Then, examples of the “F1: accompanied by change in effect state” include “F11: complete transition” and “F12: return after a certain period of time * remain for a certain period after the operation effect”.

  The above-mentioned “F11: complete transition” means an effect mode in which after the effect state is changed, the original effect state is not restored unless the effect state change lottery is won. Further, the above-mentioned “F12: Return after a certain period of time * Stay for a certain period after the operation effect” remains in the effect state after the change for a predetermined time after changing the effect state, and when the predetermined time has elapsed. This means an effect mode that returns to the original effect state.

As the above-mentioned “F2: no change in the production state”, in addition to those that do not involve any change in the production state, it is possible to exemplify a production mode such as “F21: no change in the production state under a specific situation”. . This “F21: There is no change in the production state under a specific situation” is the production mode. In a predetermined situation (or selected by lottery), the production state is changed even if touch detection is detected. There can be mentioned a production aspect such as not performing.
<< G: Change in production >>

  The aforementioned “G: change in production” indicates what kind of production change is performed based on the touch detection, and “G1: production change without affecting play” or “G2: It can be divided into “changes in production that have an effect on the appearance”. Here, “influence on playing ball” refers to, for example, a change in the production that directly influences the appearance of the game, such as a change in the execution control state of the information production that is advantageous to the player, such as a divided notification. In addition, the variation time occupies within a certain period of time varies depending on the variation time, and includes indirect ones such as when the variation efficiency varies.

  In other words, if the fluctuation time is short on average, the number of fluctuations within a certain period of time (for example, 1 hour) can be relatively increased. It is thought that it will increase. On the contrary, if the fluctuation time is long on average, the number of fluctuations within a certain time is relatively reduced, and it is theoretically considered that the amount of balls is reduced. The above-mentioned “G1: Change in production that does not affect playing” and “G2: Change in production that affects playing” are determined based on such a way of thinking.

  “G1: Change in production without affecting play” can be said to be a change without changing the variation time on the sub-main board 301 side, but this “G1: Change in production without affecting play” "G11: Change of notice system", "G12: Change of background / character, etc.", "G13: Change of decorative symbols (including those attached to symbols)" , “G14: Change of hold display” can be considered.

  As the above-mentioned “G11: change in advance notice”, change relating to “G111: advance notice”, change relating to “G112: change notice”, “G113: change of selection ratio”, “G114: change of selection content” * Those that are not limited to frequency "can be considered. Then, the change related to “G111: Pre-reading notice” means that the notice effect in the change after the change (the change) at that time is selected based on the touch detection. Further, the change relating to “G112: change notice” means that the effect of the notice for the change at that time (the change) is selected based on touch detection.

  41 (a) and 41 (b) show examples of effects related to “G112: change notice” in “G11: change of notice system”. FIG. 41A shows an effect display example before a notice relating to a touch effect (touch notice) is executed, and FIG. 41B shows an effect display example when a touch notice is performed. ing. Among these, in FIG. 41 (a), a cat character 384 with a fish during normal reach is displayed at the center of the screen as an expectation suggesting effect that suggests a possibility of a big hit due to fluctuation during execution. The degree of expectation varies depending on the color and type of the fish that the cat character 384 has appeared, and the color and type of the fish according to the progress of the pattern, such as the screen switching timing after the reach and the passage of time ( The degree of expectation of the notice) is configured to change step by step.

  In this state, if there is no change in touch detection, the cat character 384 is moved to the left of the screen according to the content determined at the time of determination of the advance notice content, and according to the progress of the above-described symbols. An expectation suggestion effect is executed so as to change (or not change) the color of the fish. On the other hand, if there is a change in touch detection after the appearance of the cat character 384, the cat character 384 changes to a monster character 385 (touch change) as shown in FIG. 41 (b), and the changed monster character. 385 is changed to an effect of moving leftward on the screen. At this time, the cat character 384 is changed to a monster character 385 having an expectation level corresponding to the color of the fish barking (for example, when the fish color is blue, the body color is blue beast).

  In addition, if it is planned to change the expectation level of the notice according to the progress of the subsequent symbols (the color of the fish is blue to red, the reliability for each color will be described later), as a benefit by changing the touch detection When the character is changed, the monster character 385 having a color (for example, yellow or red) within the expected range of expected degree after the change can be used. Further, as the expected degree of advance notice, it is possible to provide a plurality of different types of cat characters 384 and monster characters 385, respectively, so that the degree of expectation of jackpot and reach development is different.

  For example, the fish that the cat character 384 gave is a fish colored in red, yellow, blue, white, etc., so that the above-mentioned expectation increases in order from white to red. The monsters are colored in red, yellow, blue, white, etc., and the above expectations increase in order from white to red. In addition, the size, type, and fish of cats and monsters It is conceivable that the degree of expectation is expressed by a combination of an accompanying item such as.

  Furthermore, with the touch detection, the color of the fish added by the cat character 384 changes to a highly anticipated one, or the color of the monster character 385 that appears by the touch detection changes due to the second or subsequent touch detection. It is possible to perform production control so as to cause It is also possible to adopt an effect control mode in which the color of the monster character 385 is sequentially changed by repeating the second and subsequent touch detections. Further, as a notice effect, the monster character 385 is made to appear from the beginning without causing the cat character 384 to appear, and the above-described effect control can be performed.

  It is also preferable to output a character or voice that teaches that there is a possibility that the character will change or the reliability notification will change when there is a change in touch detection. It can be promoted to experience a new game effect by operation. In addition, as “G11: change in notice system”, after the notice in progress is changed due to a change in touch detection, after the change in touch detection, a predetermined condition (for example, touching again during reach after the next change) The production using the cat character 384 is performed using the monster character 385 until the achievement of the detection change, the big hit, etc., the transition to a predetermined game standby demonstration, etc.) is achieved. Changed to In addition, based on the change of the touch detection, the example that changed the content from the running notice is illustrated, but when the touch detection changes, the notice or suggestion such as “the notice character will be changed from the next change” It is also possible to execute the above and change the notice character or the like corresponding to the next change.

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned “G113: Change of selection ratio” means that an effect lottery that changes the selection frequency of various effects is performed. In addition, “G114: change of selection contents * not only frequency” is the effect of selecting backgrounds and characters used for effects on the sub-main board 301 side in addition to the selection frequency (selection ratio) of various effects. This means that the content (production component) is changed within a range in which the variation time does not change based on touch detection. In other words, this is a change that maintains the change time to the “change in the advance notice due to the details of the production (specific notice)” determined on the sub-control side when executing the same change pattern. It can also be said.

  42A to 42D schematically show an example of a selection table related to the notice effect before and after the touch change. Among these, FIGS. 42A and 42B show a selection table related to the notice effect (the change notice effect) for the change result (the result of the lottery), and FIG. (D) has shown the selection table which concerns on the notice effect (prefetching notice effect) about the change result (result of a lottery determination) after the next time. 42A and 42B show a selection table for a predetermined notice group (here, notice group α), and FIGS. 42C and 42D show other predetermined groups. The selection table for the notice group (here, notice group β) is shown.

  Furthermore, FIG. 42A shows an example of a selection table for a notice effect in each change before touch detection, and FIG. 42B shows a selection table for a notice effect in each change after touch detection. An example is shown. Similarly, FIG. 42C shows an example of a selection table related to a pre-reading notice effect before touch detection, and FIG. 42D shows an example of a selection table related to a pre-reading notice effect after touch detection. .

  Here, in order not to complicate the description, each of the notices in FIGS. 42A to 42D is one of the notices A to D, and there is a case where these notices are not performed. It is supposed to be. Furthermore, the symbols “A” to “D” in the notices A to D do not indicate the difference in the contents of the notice, but to distinguish the kind of notice in the selection tables of FIGS. 42 (a) to (d). belongs to.

  For example, the use image and the production mode of the notice A shown in FIG. 42 (a) are determined so as not to be the same as the use image and the production mode of the notice A shown in FIGS. 42 (b) to (d) in principle. It has been. The same applies to the notice C to the notice D. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same use image and effect mode may be adopted between the notices having the same symbol (A to D) in each selection table.

  Further, taking the chart of FIG. 42A as an example, columns (rows) of 0 to 5, 10 to 30, and 31 or more are provided as variation pattern numbers. For the notice A, the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 40%, the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are set at 40%, and the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 and higher are selected at a rate of 20%. It is like that.

  Further, for the notice B, the variation pattern of the variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 is selected at a rate of 14%, the variation pattern of the variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 is 35%, and the variation pattern of the variation pattern number 31 or more is selected at a rate of 35%. It is like that. Further, for the notice C, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 is selected at 1%, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 is 10%, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number 31 or higher is selected at a ratio of 44%. It is like that.

  Regarding the notice D, the selection ratio is 0% for any of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number 31 or higher. Is not to be done. Furthermore, the ratio of the change pattern numbers 0 to 5 being 45%, the change pattern number 10 to 30 being 15%, and the change pattern having the change pattern number 31 or more being 1% is the ratio that the notice is not made. Yes.

  The relationship between the variation pattern, the notice, and the selection ratio as described above is determined as follows. That is, here, 100 variation patterns having variation pattern numbers of 0 to 99 are provided. The above-described variation pattern numbers 0 to 5, 10 to 30, and 31 or more are included in these variation patterns 0 to 99.

  Here, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are non-reach fluctuations that are fluctuations that do not reach (for example, the fluctuation pattern random number in FIG. 11A is 15000 to 49999 in 5000 to 49999). The fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 6 to 9 are non-reach fluctuations, but are related to special non-reach fluctuations that are not suitable for the aforementioned notice group α (for example, the fluctuation pattern random number in FIG. 11A is 5000). 12500-14999). Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are out of the reach fluctuation (here, “weak SP reach”) with relatively low big hit reliability (for example, in FIG. 11A). The fluctuation pattern random number is 5000 to 12499 of 5000 to 49999), and the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 31 to 49 are out of reach and have relatively high hit reliability (here, “strong SP reach”). (For example, the fluctuation pattern random number in FIG. 11A is 0 to 4999).

  Further, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 50 to 99 are hit fluctuations that are hits. The fluctuation pattern numbers 50 to 99 are for reach variation that cannot be distinguished from the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 49 until the middle stage, and are different from the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 49 for the hit determination special. Includes fluctuations. Note that the notice A is a “weak notice” with a relatively low jackpot expectation, the notice B is a “medium notice” with a medium jackpot expectation, and the notice C is a big hit so that the explanation is not complicated here. It is premised on a “weak notice” with a relatively high expectation.

  Based on these matters, the selection ratio of the notice group α based on the selection table shown in FIG. According to the example shown in FIG. 42 (a), the change (the change) at that time is based on the change pattern 5 (the change pattern whose change pattern number is 5) before the change processing of the notice group selection ratio by touch detection. In the case of fluctuation (non-reachable pattern fluctuation), the selection ratio of the notice group α is that the probability of executing the notice A is 40%, the probability of executing the notice B is 14%, the probability of executing the notice C is 1%, The probability of not executing the notice of the notice group α is 45%.

  Similarly, when the variation is a weak SP reach symbol variation based on the variation pattern 30 (variation pattern having a variation pattern number of 30), the selection ratio of the notice group α has a 40% probability of executing the notice A, and the notice. The probability of executing B is 35%, the probability of executing the notice C is 10%, and the probability of not executing the notice of the notice group α is 15%.

  Similarly, when the change is a pattern change (strong change) based on the change pattern 31 (strong SP reach) or the change pattern 50, the selection ratio of the notice group α has a 20% probability of executing the notice A and the notice B Is 35%, the probability of executing the notice C is 44%, and the probability of not executing the notice of the notice group α is 1%.

  In the example of FIG. 42A, since the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern is determined in this way, the notice A of the notice group α is the case where the non-reach out of fluctuation pattern having the highest selection ratio is selected. However, it can be said that it is highly likely to be executed (40% of non-reach). Therefore, the notice A of the notice group α can be said to be a notice having a very low degree of expectation although the degree of expectation of the hit is higher than that without the notice.

  On the other hand, for example, the notice C of the notice group α is very unlikely to be executed with the non-reach fluctuation pattern having the highest selection rate (1% at the time of non-reach out), and at the time of strong SP reach or hit Since the notice is easy to be executed, it can be said that it is a notice with high expectation per hit.

  Note that the variation patterns with the variation pattern numbers 0 to 49 have different selection rates at the time of deviation. For example, the rate at which any one of the fluctuation patterns 0 to 5 is selected is 80% at the time of loss, and the rate at which any of the fluctuation patterns 6 to 9 is selected is 10 at the time of loss. %. Furthermore, the ratio that any of the variation patterns 10 to 30 is selected is 9% at the time of loss, and the ratio that any of the variation patterns 31 to 49 is selected is 1% at the time of loss. is there. Further, any one of the variation patterns 50 to 99 is selected only at the time of hit.

  Therefore, for convenience of explanation here, assuming that the hit probability is 1/100, the possibility of the notice A appearing at the time of loss is 80% of the selected ratio for the variation patterns No. 5 to No. 5. The product of 40% based on the table of FIG. 42A is 32% (= 80% × 40%). For the variation patterns Nos. 10 to 30, the product of 9% of the selected ratio and 40% based on the table of FIG. 42A is 3.6% (9% × 40%). Furthermore, for the variation patterns No. 31 to No. 49, the product of 1% of the selected ratio and 20% based on the table of FIG. 42A is 0.2% (= 1% × 20%). .

  On the other hand, the possibility that the notice A appears at the time of hitting is 0.2% (the product of 1% of the ratio selected for the fluctuation patterns No. 50 to No. 99 and 20% based on the table of FIG. 42A). 1% × 20%). From these facts, the rate at which the notice A is executed for one change is 36% (= 32% + 3.6% + 0.2% + 0.2%).

  Thus, since the ratio of the notice A being selected at the time of hitting is only 0.2%, the reliability at the time when the notice A appears (at the time when it is not known whether the hit is lost or not) is 0. About 4% (= 0.2% + 0.2%).

  On the other hand, after touch detection, the selection table shown in FIG. In this selection table, for notice A, the variation pattern of variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 is 40%, the variation pattern of variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 is 0%, and the variation pattern of variation pattern number 31 or higher is 20%. It is to be selected.

  For the notice B, the variation pattern of the variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 is selected at a rate of 0%, the variation pattern of the variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 is 70%, and the variation pattern of the variation pattern number 31 or more is selected at a rate of 9%. It is like that. Further, regarding the notice C, the selection ratio is 0% for the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number 31 or higher, so that it is not selected. It has become.

  For the notice D, the variation patterns 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 0%, the variation pattern 10 to 30 is changed to 29%, and the variation pattern 31 or more is selected at a rate of 70%. It is like that. Furthermore, the ratio of the change pattern number 0 to 5 is 59%, the change pattern number 10 to 30 is 1%, and the change pattern number 31 or more is 1%. Yes.

  And, for example, when notice B appears in the variation pattern 10 or more, a benefit more than reach is confirmed for the player, and the reliability is higher than notice B (strong SP reach or ratio selected at the time of hitting) The notice D is newly selectable as an effect. For this reason, after touch detection, it is possible to change the content and reliability of various types of notices selected in the notice group α, compared to before touch detection.

  Note that the pre-reading notice group β can also have different selection ratios before and after touch detection, similarly to the notice group α shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b) (FIG. 42 (c), (See (d)). Further, in the case of a pre-reading notice to be described later shown in FIGS. 42C and 42D, the sub main board is based on a pre-reading command (having pre-reading code information) serving as prior notice information from the main board (102). The CPU 521 of 301 specifies the variation pattern number.

  The selection ratio described here is designed by the designer with an optimal balance based on the concept of how reliable the various notices are, and is limited to the exemplified numerical values and balances. It is not a thing. For example, although the numerical values described here are changed, the magnitude relationship between the numerical values can be the same as that described here.

  The above-mentioned “G12: change of background / character” means that the background, character, etc. are changed based on touch detection with respect to effects other than the notice-type effects. In addition, the above-mentioned “G13: Change of decorative design (including those attached to the design)” means that the production design 190 is made different from that of a different design or classification based on touch detection. To do. Furthermore, “thing accompanying the symbol” may include a portion other than the element symbol which is the symbol element effect symbol (element symbol which is a non-symbol element effect symbol) described above.

  The above-mentioned “G14: Change of hold display” indicates the hold display on the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 shown in FIGS. 8A, 8B, 33B, and the like. , Meaning to change based on touch detection. As a change of the hold display, it is conceivable to change various display modes such as design and arrangement (for example, the round design in FIG. 8A to the star design in FIG. 33). It is also conceivable to change the arrangement of the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197.

  Examples of the above-mentioned “G2: Change in production that has an influence on the appearance” include “G21: Change in fluctuation pattern (variation time)” and “G22: Execution of notification (AT system function)”. . Among these, as “G21: change of change pattern (change time)”, “G211: change of selection ratio” and “G212: change of selection content * not only frequency” can be considered.

  The above-mentioned “G211: change of selection ratio” means that a variation pattern lottery that changes each selection frequency is performed for various variation patterns that define the variation time. “G212: Change of selected content * not only frequency” changes not only the selection frequency of various fluctuation patterns but also the change time itself to be selected, and, as described above, the selection frequency (selection of various effects). In addition to the ratio), on the side of the sub-main board 301, the production contents (production components) such as the background and characters used for production are changed based on touch detection to change the variation time. I mean. In other words, this is a change by changing the change time to the “change in the advance notice due to the details of the production (specific notice)” determined on the sub-control side when executing the same change pattern. It can be said that there is.

  The above-mentioned “G22: execution of notification (AT system function)” means that a predetermined notification is executed based on touch detection. For example, the AT widely used in a revolving game machine It is conceivable to use touch detection in combination with game characteristics similar to (assist time).

More specifically, for example, the presentation display device 60 presents the operation timing of the touch sensor (touch switch 310) and the touch is detected at the timing, and the development of the presentation can be exemplified. Further, the launch direction (right strike or left strike) advantageous to the player, the launch timing advantageous to the player (such as “hit!” Or “stop!”), Or a combination thereof, An example of notification of a combination of these and a temporal element (such as “start right-handed!” After XX seconds) can be given.
<< H: Trigger parameters for touch effects >>

  Among the processes executed based on the touch detection, “H: related to trigger parameter of touch effect” includes “H1: clock timer processing (addition / subtraction / clearing etc.)”, “H2: touch detection. The number of times processing (addition / subtraction / clear) ”,“ H3: other ”can be considered. Here, the “trigger parameter” means a parameter (element of a predetermined variable) related to execution of the touch effect, which is calculated or set in response to touch detection.

  More specifically, the above-described “H1: clock timer processing (addition / subtraction / clearing, etc.)” is a clock timer (touch effect) used for execution of a touch effect or whether or not it is effective as a trigger. Specifically, a timer value for determining whether or not to consider the next touch detection as an effective execution trigger for the production is triggered by the touch detection. It means something that performs addition, subtraction or clearing. For example, as an example corresponding to the “specific condition” shown in “The right or wrong of execution” (FIGS. 24A and 24B) to be described later, the operation of the operation button (operation button 22 or the like) is in the control state 1 In such a case, the processing related to the time after the operation of the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) corresponds to “H1: Clock timer processing (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)” here. It will be a thing.

  The above-described “H2: Touch detection frequency processing (addition / subtraction / clear)” performs processing related to the number of times of touch detection in a predetermined period, and performs addition, subtraction, or clearing of the counter value related to the time count. Means something. In addition, “H3: Other” described above is a trigger parameter other than “H1: Clock timer processing (addition / subtraction / clear, etc.)” and “H2: Touch detection count processing (addition / subtraction / clear)”. It means what can be.

  For example, when changing the effect state or the effect / variation pattern in “F: change in effect state” or “G: change in effect” described above, the CPU 521 of the sub-main substrate 301 performs the effect at that time. The process of recognizing and grasping the selected state and updating the information related to the production is executed, but the process necessary for grasping and updating is exemplified as corresponding to “H3: Other”. Can do.

  More specifically, for example, as a control mode included in the above-mentioned “F21: There is no change in the production state under a specific situation”, it is assumed that the touch production is not executed in the four variations after the end of the big hit. And in such a thing, the process which confirms the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation after the end of jackpot can be illustrated as what corresponds to "H3: Others."

  In addition to this, a situation in which a touch effect can be executed when a touch is detected in a game machine in a control mode in which the touch effect is not executed during a symbol change or during a specific effect period (a situation where execution is restricted). It is also possible to exemplify processing for confirming whether or not.

Further, with respect to the “specific condition” shown in “Proper execution of rendering” (FIGS. 24A and 24B) described later, the rendering is performed when the touch detection changes from “present” to “none”. At the same time, if the “specific condition” is “under a win condition”, the process of determining whether or not the symbol variation currently being executed is a win is referred to as “H3: Other ”.
<Performance permission / regulation conditions>
<< J: Setting of permission timing >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned “production permission / regulation conditions” will be described. First, the “effects permission / regulation conditions” are not only the effects based on the touch detection but also the effects based on the touch detection, even if the touch detection is changed under each gaming situation. Means a condition used to determine whether or not to allow execution of. In other words, it is specified that the touch effect is executed as the gaming state, and the effect is executed when there is a change in touch detection in a state where the present effect permission / regulation conditions are satisfied. Has become. As an item of “production permission / regulation conditions”, “J: setting of permission timing” can be cited. This “J: setting of permission timing” is a predetermined production or game state triggered by touch detection. This means that the permission conditions and the regulatory conditions are released. Furthermore, “J: setting of permission timing” can be classified into “J1: internal timer” and “J2: compounding with other elements”.

  Among these, “J1: Internal timer” can be exemplified by those having “J11: Time characteristics (variable / comparison with 1 fluctuation)”. For example, it is possible to provide a management timer for managing whether or not the touch effect can be executed (permitted), and this management timer can be referred to as an “internal timer”. This management timer (internal timer) can be considered to be included in the timekeeping timer in “H1: Timekeeping timer processing (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)” described above. Then, by using this management timer (internal timer), management of whether or not to perform touch effects (also referred to as “possibility” or “presence”) and restrictions on touch effects (also referred to as “restrictions”) are managed. Is possible.

  Further, regarding the internal timer (management timer), a “variable” timer can be considered in addition to managing a certain time. As this “variable”, for example, it is possible to consider changing the time set for executing the touch effect according to some condition. The “any condition” can be exemplified such that the time allowed for the execution of the touch effect differs between the first detection and the second detection.

  In addition, as a “comparison with one variation”, as a timer (time) for allowing a touch effect, it can be selected in a gaming machine or a variation pattern with the longest variation time that can be selected at that time Also, it can be exemplified that a long time is set. Then, it can be said that the determination of the effect output mode based on the touch detection as described above is to use the touch detection as a control element for permission or regulation related to the output of the effect.

  In such a case, it is possible to optimize the execution opportunity of the touch effect. That is, in recent symbol games, generally symbol variation (symbol variation with high expectation like “Super 1” in FIG. 11) exceeding 180 seconds is performed as the longest variation time. On the other hand, if there is no time for which the execution of the touch effect is permitted longer than such a time, there is a possibility that the opportunity for executing the provided touch effect may be lost. Therefore, based on the relationship with the time of one variation, the opportunity to execute the touch effect is appropriately set by permitting the execution of the touch effect after the elapse of a time shorter than the above-described long time (such as 180 seconds). It is possible to effectively use the touch effect.

  The above-mentioned “J2: compound with other elements” are “J21: presence / absence of operation button”, “J22: presence / absence of twisting operation of handle”, “J23: command from main board”, “J24: game” It can be divided into the “machine state (situation)” item, which means that touch effects are permitted or restricted in combination with one or more of these elements. Among these, “J21: presence / absence of operation of effect button” determines the condition for permitting or restricting a predetermined effect for the combination of operation of operation button (effect button) 22 and touch operation. It is meant to be an element to do.

  The above-mentioned “J22: Presence / absence of twisting operation of the handle” uses a combination of the twisting operation of the firing handle 20 and the touch operation as a condition for permitting or restricting the production, and “J23: Command from main board” is the main This means that the reception of a predetermined command from the substrate 102 to the sub-main substrate 301 and a touch operation are combined.

  Examples of “J24: gaming machine state (situation)” include “J241: special state such as abnormality”, “J242: gaming standby state”, and “J243: specific performance state (subdivided)”. be able to. Among these, “J241: special state such as abnormality” means that touch detection was performed in a special situation where an error was detected or a situation that was difficult to occur in normal games, It means to be a condition.

  The above-mentioned “J242: game standby state” means that, for example, touch detection in each state in the above-mentioned “B1: game standby state” is used as a condition for permission or regulation of performance. . In addition, the above-mentioned “J243: specific production state (subdivided)” means that touch detection is made during various production states as conditions for production permission or regulation. ing.

  For example, in the case of “B1: standby state (normal demonstration display)”, the production is performed according to the production states of “B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (power saving)”. Examples of permission and regulation are available. Also, in the case of “B2: gaming state”, what permits or regulates the production according to the production state (point of which production mode is staying) related to “B21: symbol variation state”. It can be illustrated. Further, in the case of “B22: hitting”, depending on the state of the winning effect (effect pattern) that permits or regulates the effect, according to the probability variation or normal hit distinction and the number of consecutive resorts Examples that allow or restrict the production can be given.

  The “permission” and “restriction” described here are not limited to permitting (permitting all) or restricting (all restriction) all elements in the production. For example, depending on the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 10, one of a plurality of types of effects that may be executed as a touch effect is permitted (partially permitted) or restricted (partially restricted). It is also possible to make it.

  Also, “J2: Composite with other elements” can be combined with “J1: Internal timer” described above, for example. In this case, in the game standby state (“B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” or the like), the operation button (22) or the like is produced before the predetermined elapsed time reaches the predetermined time (about 20 seconds or the like). Even when the operation unit is operated, when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (such as 5 seconds), the output of an effect (such as standby screen B) triggered by the subsequent touch detection is permitted. it can. Here, the above-mentioned “predetermined time” is, for example, if the time required for executing the corresponding touch effect is 6 seconds, the touch effect for 6 seconds is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, a plurality of times such as 3 times). A possible period (about 20 seconds here) is considered.

Furthermore, regardless of whether the recovery is performed by a normal recovery operation (recovery in the case of NO in S111 or S113) or the recovery by a specific recovery operation (recovery operation in the case of YES in S113) when the power is restored from the power-off. Can be set to a predetermined value (such as the above-mentioned “predetermined time” of 5 seconds).
<Other 1>
<< K: Change in touch state >>

  Subsequently, as the item of “other 1”, “K: change in touch state”, “L: method of touch detection”, and “M: method of transmission to sub” can be cited. Among these, “K: change in touch state” means that the presence or absence of contact with the touch sensor (touch switch 310) is utilized for game control. As for “K: change in touch state”, “K1: non-touch → touch” and “K2: touch → non-touch” can be considered.

Among these, “K1: non-touch → touch” means that the state changes from a non-touch state where the touch sensor (310) is not touched to a touch state where the touch sensor (310) is touched. In addition, “K2: touch → non-touch” means that the touch state touching the touch sensor (310) changes to the non-touch state not touching the touch sensor (310).
<< L: Touch Detection Method >>

The above-mentioned “L: touch detection method” means that the difference in how touch detection is performed is utilized for game control. For “L: touch detection method”, “L1: touch only” and “L2: handle operation included” can be considered. Of these, “L1: touch only” means that game control is performed only on the operation of the touch sensor (310). Further, “L2: Including handle operation” means that game control is performed on condition that both the operation to the touch sensor (310) and the rotation operation of the firing handle 20 are performed. Among these, when “L1: touch only” is adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 10, the touch detection process can be easily performed. In addition, when “L2: Including handle operation” is adopted, it is possible to prevent a touch effect from being performed when a player accidentally touches the launch handle (20), for example, and more accurately. In addition, the player's willingness to start a game can be taken and used for subsequent processing.
<< M: Transmission Method to Sub >>

  The above-mentioned “M: transmission method to sub” means a matter of when the touch signal detected by the main substrate 102 is transmitted to the sub main substrate 301. For “M: transmission method to sub”, it is possible to consider “M1: transmission in principle (main → sub)” and “M2: grasp the situation and transmit (main → sub)”.

Among these, “M1: principle always transmission (main ⇒ sub)” is a case where a touch signal (including a signal indicating the content of the touch signal) is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main unless there is a special circumstance such as communication abnormality. This means that it is always transmitted to the substrate 301. “M2: Grasp the situation and send (main ⇒ sub)” is a state where the main board 102 judges the situation at that time, grasps the situation, and in a predetermined case, the touch signal ( (Including a signal representing the content of the touch signal) from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301.
<Usage form related to touch state change>
<< The right or wrong of the performance >>

  Next, a result of studying a specific form for utilizing the change in the touch state for effect control will be described. 24 (a) and 24 (b) are a summary table showing the pros and cons of performing effects when changes in the touch state are detected in various gaming states. Here, “whether or not to produce” can be paraphrased, for example, “whether or not to produce” or “whether or not to produce”.

  For example, FIGS. 24A and 24B show “change state”, “number of changes,” “target”, and “game machine state” from the left of the chart. Of these, the upper row in the “change state” represents the case where the touch detection has changed from the “no” state to the “present” state, and the lower row represents that the touch detection has changed from the “present” state to the “no” state. This represents a case where the state has changed.

  The above-mentioned “number of times of change” represents an item regarding the number of times of touch signal state change. “First time” represents the first change of the touch signal, and “after the predetermined time” represents the state change after the second time. Furthermore, “specific condition” represents a specific condition other than the number of changes, and as an example, indicates that the operation button 22 or the like has been operated.

  Here, as the “state change” and “change”, for example, the change of the touch signal from the on state (or off state) to the off state (or on state) can be exemplified. Further, the intensity of the touch signal (for example, the height of the voltage) may be changed in a stepwise manner, and may be referred to as “state change” or “change” including the step change. In addition, each item such as “first time” in the “number of times of change” is displayed when the touch detection changes from the “no” state to the “present” state, and the touch detection from the “present” state to the “no” state. It is common to any of the cases where the state changes to "".

  As the above “target”, “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” can be considered. The meaning of these items can be the same as “D13: Image display device”, “D11: Speaker”, and “D12: Lamp” in “D1: Production output destination” shown in FIG. . Furthermore, the items “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are determined in common for each item such as “first time” in “number of changes”.

  As described above, the change in the touch detection includes a change in the case where the player changes from the state of holding the firing handle 20 to a released state, and a state in which the player holds the firing handle 20 from a non-held state. There are two ways of changing, and for example, the operation may be performed a plurality of times during a certain period such as in the same gaming state. Furthermore, the touch detection is performed before and after the occurrence of the situation where the specific condition is satisfied at a timing that cannot be completely predicted, such as the situation where the production button (the operation button 22 or the like) is operated. May change. For this reason, in the following, depending on each state of the gaming machine, the change mode of touch detection, whether or not it is under a specific condition, etc., the presence / absence of execution and the execution content are determined for the touch effect, and for the determined content, see FIG. However, it will be explained.

  FIG. 24 shows a case where touch detection is changed in a predetermined manner under normal conditions (non-specific conditions) in each state of the gaming machine (shown as “gaming machine state”) and under specific conditions. This is a diagram illustrating the concept of a touch effect to be executed when the change occurs. As the above-mentioned “game machine state”, “setting change relationship”, “game standby”, “during symbol change” shown in FIG. 24A, “winning”, “ Can be mentioned. Among these, “setting change relationship” includes “setting changing” and “setting display” related to the setting change described above. The “setting change in progress” described above represents a situation in which the setting change is started and the setting change is being performed, and “setting display is in progress” represents a situation in which the setting value is being displayed.

Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, symbols “◯”, “Δ”, and “×” are used. Among these symbols, the symbol “◯” represents “execution” of the performance by the device listed as “target”. Furthermore, the symbol “△” means that the performance by the “target” device may be “executed (including concepts such as execution under a certain condition or only a part of the device)”. The symbol “x” represents “not executed”. Here, the “certain condition” related to the symbol “Δ” represents, for example, that the winning is related to a lottery with a predetermined probability. As the lottery based on a predetermined probability, a lottery in which a winning ratio is different for each set value (FIG. 12) can be exemplified in addition to a lottery that wins with a common probability regardless of a set value.
<<< Setting change relationship >>>

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24A, when the state of the gaming machine is in a “setting change relationship” state (any one of “setting changing” and “setting display”), touch detection is “ When “No” is changed to “Yes”, or “Yes” is changed to “No” (in the case of “First time”), a part of the LED (“Lamp”) provided on the gaming machine frame or the game board is used. Control is performed such that the touch effect is executed (indicated by “Δ”) and the touch effect by the liquid crystal display device (“image”) and the speaker (“voice”) is not executed. On the other hand, when a change in the touch state is detected again after the change in the touch state is detected for the first time (shown as “after a predetermined time”), only the touch effect by “image” and “voice” can be used. In addition, the touch effect using a part of the “lamp” is not executed (indicated by “x”). Furthermore, in “specific conditions” such as after the operation of the effect buttons (such as the operation buttons 22) is performed while the setting is changed or displayed, the touch effect is executed even when a change in the touch state is detected for the first time. Control is performed (indicated by “x”). In other words, in the setting change state, an effect based on the detection by the touch detection unit may not be output regardless of the change state of the detection state of the touch detection unit and / or the detection mode of the rotation operation detection unit. Is possible.

In this way, in the example of FIG. 24A, if the state is related to a setting change such as “setting changing” or “setting displayed”, is the touch effect not executed even if the touch detection is performed? Even if it is executed, only the effect of notifying the touch detection is executed. By doing so, the touch effect does not hinder setting confirmation or setting change work, and it can be confirmed whether touch detection is normally performed even during setting change work.
<<< Waiting for games >>>

  Among the above-mentioned “game machine states”, “game standby” includes “demo screen”, “adjustment screen”, “variable standby screen”, “initialization notification (medium)”, “abnormality notification (medium)” Can be mentioned. Among these, the “demo screen” is the display state of “B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” described above, and the “adjustment screen” is “B13: game standby C (production) related to environment setting (customization) such as volume. The display state of “sound setting screen)” and the “variation standby screen” correspond to the display state of “B12: game standby B (during symbol stop)”, respectively.

  The “initialization notification” during the above-described game standby means that the initialization notification is in progress, and the above-described “C2B1: power-off recovery state and game standby state” and subsequent initialization are performed. The notification corresponds to the state during the execution period.

  In addition, the “abnormality notification” during the above-described game standby is an error (referred to as “recoverable error” or the like) that can return the control state of the gaming machine to a normal state without power-on if an error is released. This corresponds to the state “B1: gaming standby state” described above and the state during the execution of the returnable error notification.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (a), during the game standby displaying the “demo screen”, when the touch detection is changed from “none” to “present” for the first time, “image”, “sound”, Control is performed so as to execute a touch effect using a “lamp” (indicated by “◯”). In addition, after a change in touch detection from “none” to “present” for the first time, if a change in the touch state is detected again (in the case of a predetermined number of times or more), a certain condition (for example, for each set value) Control is performed so as to execute the touch effect by “voice” based on the lottery result based on the winning ratio provided) (indicated by “Δ”). Furthermore, in “specific conditions”, such as after a production button is operated while the “demo screen” is displayed, the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” for the first time. In this case, control is performed so that only the touch effect by voice is executed without performing the touch effect using “image” and “lamp” that is normally performed (indicated by “Δ”).

  On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, control is performed so that the touch effect is not executed even if the change is “first time” (indicated by “×”). . In addition, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two times or more) or after a performance button is operated during game standby, In the same way as when touch detection is changed from "No" to "Yes", control is performed so that the effects of "Image", "Sound", and "Lamp" are not executed (indicated by "X"). .

  In this way, in the example of FIG. 24A, when the demonstration screen is being displayed, if the touch detection that occurs when the game ends is changed from “present” to “none”, the touch effect is executed. On the other hand, it is configured to perform a touch effect when the touch detection changes from “none” to “presence”. For example, a fraudulent device that forcibly enables touch detection (for example, a handle and an amusement island) It is possible to suitably prevent a touch effect from being performed when the devices that connect the ground wires to each other so as to be conductive are removed. Furthermore, only when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” under a predetermined condition, the game entertainment can be further improved by executing a different touch effect. In particular, when using a touch effect as an effect at the start of a game, when the player indicates the will of the game by operating the effect button, etc., the touch effect is omitted, thereby satisfying the player's needs. Execution of performances that do not follow can be suppressed.

  Although details will be described later, in the example of FIG. 24A, the demonstration screen display is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the symbol is stopped, in other words, when a predetermined time or more has elapsed since the game was stopped. Since it is a display screen (such as “standby screen A” in FIG. 33A), the situation in which touch detection changes from “present” to “none” is extremely limited. For this reason, by not performing the touch effect in the situation, the meaning of the original touch effect, such as indicating that the game is in a state to start, is never lost.

  Furthermore, in the “adjustment screen” in the “waiting for game” state, when the touch detection is changed from “none” to “present” for the first time, a touch effect using “image” is not executed, but “sound And a touch effect using part of the “lamp”. In addition, after a change in touch detection from “No” to “Yes” for the first time, if a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times), only touch effects using “image” In addition, control is performed so that touch effects using “voice” and “lamp” are not executed. In addition, while the “adjustment screen” is being displayed under certain conditions, such as after the production button has been operated, the “audio” that is normally performed even when the touch detection changes from “none” to “present” for the first time ”And“ touch ”using“ lamp ”are controlled so as not to be executed. On the other hand, in the “adjustment screen” in the “waiting for game” state, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “none”, whether or not the change is the first time and whether or not the change is under a specific condition. Control is performed so as not to perform the touch effect regardless of whether or not there is.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when the adjustment screen is being displayed, if the touch detection that occurs when the game is ended is changed from “present” to “none” in the same way as during the demonstration display, the touch effect is displayed. If the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes”, the touch effect of “Image”, which is highly likely to hinder the adjustment work, is not performed, and it is relatively difficult to affect the adjustment work. The touch production using “voice” and “lamp” is configured to be executed, and both the adjustment work and the touch production can be appropriately executed. Also, unlike “during demo display”, even if multiple touch detections are made, multiple touch effects are not executed on the adjustment screen. No output or lamp output is executed, and the most important adjustment work is not disturbed while the adjustment screen is displayed. Further, when the operation of the effect button is used for the adjustment work, when the adjustment work is started, the touch effect is not executed after that, so that the most important adjustment work is inhibited during the adjustment screen display. There is nothing.

  Subsequently, in the “variable standby screen” in the “game standby” state, when touch detection is changed from “none” to “present” for the first time, a touch effect using “voice” and “lamp” A touch effect using a part is executed, and control is performed so as to execute a touch effect using an “image” under a predetermined condition (which will be described later in detail, in the case of a variable standby screen when moving from the demo screen). Also, after touch detection has changed from “No” to “Yes” for the first time, a change in the touch state is detected again (in the case of a predetermined number of times or later), and after a production button is operated, etc. While the “variation standby screen” under the condition is being displayed, the touch effect using “image” and “lamp” is not executed, and the “sound” effect is determined under certain conditions (for example, a lottery with a predetermined probability). Control to execute in (winning).

  On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent” for the first time, the touch effect using the “image” is not executed, but under certain conditions (for example, winning a predetermined probability lottery). Control is performed to execute a touch effect using “speech” or “lamp” (part of it). In addition, even when a change in the touch state is detected again after the first change from “No” to “Yes” (after a predetermined number of times), the touch detection is not performed for the first time. Control is performed so as to execute a touch effect using “voice” or “lamp” (a part thereof) in a lottery with a lower probability than that performed. On the other hand, during the display of the “variation standby screen” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button, the touch effect using “image” and “lamp” is not executed, Then, control is performed so as not to execute the touch effect.

  In this way, during the “variation standby screen” display, unlike the display of the “demo screen”, even if the touch detection changes from “none” to “present”, a part of the “image” effect, etc. under certain conditions The screen is easy to stay when the game is interrupted for a short time after the game is stopped, for example, when a player turns on a cigarette or drinks a drink. In this case, the effect of the touch effect is reduced as compared with the normal demonstration screen so that the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable when the game is resumed. On the other hand, since the transition standby screen often shifts immediately after the end of the game, if the player interrupts the steering wheel operation, he / she wants to continue the game without promoting too much It is preferable to execute the effect. For this reason, in the present embodiment, in this situation, by performing the “sound” and “lamp” effects without performing the “image” touch effects, “do not encourage the sinking” and “continue the game” “I want to let you do it”. Note that “image” can also be performed, and in that case, it is preferable to execute an effect display including content that suppresses “recession”.

Furthermore, in the “initialization notification” in the “game waiting” state, when the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” and when the touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No” Regardless of the status of “number of changes, etc.” (regardless of whether it is “first time” or after the second time), control is performed so that any “image”, “sound”, or “ramp” effect is not executed. To do. In addition, control is performed so that any effect of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” is not executed regardless of whether or not the state is in a specific condition related to the effect button or the like.

  In this way, during the “initialization notification” in the “game standby” state, the touch effect is executed when the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes”, or from “Yes” to “No”. It is configured so that there is an initialization notification after power-on (in a broad sense, a power-on notification) period, which is usually meaningless or extremely meaningless in situations where the player does not operate the steering wheel By not performing the above, it is possible to reduce power consumption at the time of initialization, suppress noise at the game shop, and reduce discomfort to the operator. Even in this state, for example, a part of the “lamp” or the like is performed so as to be able to confirm a change in the touch detection state, in other words, a minimum effect within the range where the above-described effect can be obtained. May be.

  In addition, in the “abnormality notification” in the “game waiting” state, when the touch detection is changed from “none” to “present” for the first time, control is performed so as not to perform the touch effect, while a predetermined number of times (for example, When it is determined that the touch detection has changed from “none” to “present” or more (for example, about 10 times), then “image” “sound” every predetermined number of times (for example, every second time thereafter). Using the “lamp”, control is performed so that it can be understood that the touch detection is performed normally, and a touch effect indicating normal notification according to the specification is executed. On the other hand, during “abnormality notification” under certain conditions, such as after the production button is operated, if the touch detection changes from “none” to “present”, the “number of changes etc.” Control (whether the first time or the second time or later) is performed so as not to perform the touch effect.

  On the other hand, if the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”, is it under a specific condition such as after the operation button is operated, regardless of the status of “Number of changes”, etc. Control is made so that the touch effect is not executed regardless of whether or not.

  As described above, during the “abnormality notification” in the “game standby” state, even if the touch detection changes from “none” to “present”, the touch effect is not performed unless the operation is performed a plurality of times. It is configured. And, in a situation where an abnormality has occurred, usually when the player does not perform the steering operation or unavoidably continues the game, there is no sense or it may increase discomfort by executing There is no execution of a certain production. By doing in this way, the discomfort to the player at the time of abnormality can be reduced. Even in this state, a minute (suppressed) effect for notifying that a handle touch has been made in the confirmation of the abnormal state, a production for confirming the abnormal state, and a complicated notification opportunity are set. In such a case, an effect such as notification of the information, in other words, a minimum (minimum) effect in a range where the above-described effect can be obtained may be executed. It is also preferable to execute a special touch effect that apologizes for the occurrence of an abnormality when the touch effect is triggered after the return screen after notification of the abnormality.

Note that in the case of an error abnormality (which can be referred to as an “unrecoverable error” or the like) that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned on again in response to the above-described recoverable error, In order to make it easier to understand abnormalities that cannot be performed, the production process itself is controlled to be stopped (prohibited) including the touch production, but when priority is given to simplification of the process. In the case of a recoverable error, it is also possible to execute the same processing as in the case of a non-recoverable error without prohibiting the touch effect.
<<< During design variation >>>

  Among the “game machine states” described above, “in design change” may include “in design stop”, “in reach”, “during specific production”, and “abnormal display screen”. Among these, “at the time of symbol stop” indicates, for example, when the effect symbol (190) is in a stop state immediately before the start of change, and until a fixed stop from the shake change (temporary stop) state immediately before the stop of change. In addition, it seems that the situation has become a low-speed state that is not classified as a state in which the symbol is changing, or that some of the production symbols are temporarily stopped and only the remaining part is changing (during low-speed fluctuation, etc.) It is also possible to include such a situation in “when the symbol is stopped”.

  The above “at the time of reach” means at the time of reach production. As the “reach time”, for example, a normal reach effect as illustrated in FIG. 37A or an SP reach effect as illustrated in FIG. 37B is performed. The end of the reach effect can be the timing when the reach effect ends and the decorative symbol corresponding to the confirmed symbol (special symbol mode scheduled to stop) temporarily stops.

  The above-mentioned “during a specific effect” means a situation in which a predetermined specific effect is being executed. This “specific production” is not shown in the figure, but in a state where the reach production is not being performed, the expectation of development to reach is high, and the expectation of winning is relatively high In addition to during the execution of an effect that includes a notice that indicates the event, etc., during the execution of an effect that predicts the normal symbol, etc., and during the above-mentioned reach, the effect and button operation that promotes the operation of the effect button Special effects performed in parallel with the reach effect, such as effects executed by, cut-in effects, blackout effects (effects that make the screen black), the execution mode is different or not executed even with the same reach effect For example, during execution of a certain production).

  The above-described “abnormal display screen” means that a predetermined image is being displayed when a predetermined abnormality occurs. The “abnormal display screen” is not shown in the figure, but a message for notifying an occurrence of an error such as, for example, out of a prize ball, full lower tray, door opening, or an abnormal operation of a movable accessory, while the pattern variation is continued Examples that display symbols and symbols.

Among these, in the case of “when the symbol is stopped”, when the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” for the first time, “Image” is provided on the condition that there is no effect on other effects performed when “When the symbol is stopped”. ”And“ voice ”are controlled to be performed, while“ lamp ”is controlled not to be performed. Further, after the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” and the touch effect is executed, control is performed so that the touch effect is not executed even when the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” again. Further, control is performed so as not to execute any of the “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” during “design stop” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button.

  On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, control is performed so that the touch effect is not executed even if the change is the first time. In addition, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two times or more) or after a performance button is operated during game standby, As in the case where the touch detection is changed from “absent” to “present”, control is performed so that the effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are not executed.

  In this way, during “design stop” during symbol variation, the effect that is performed when the symbol is stopped is not hindered only when the touch detection that occurs when the game is resumed changes from “none” to “present”. For example, when the symbol is stopped when the reach is lost, voice display such as “Please do your best!” And resumption of the game are performed. The player's psychology when the game is resumed by executing the effect image that is received favorably in the case of a size or area that does not hinder the visibility of the display state of the symbol stop, or at such timing The effect which makes it good can be expected. In addition, there is a player who repeatedly hits the operation unit regardless of whether or not the effect button is valid in order to expect re-variation when the symbol is stopped. For this reason, it is configured not to execute the touch effect under certain conditions such as when the effect button is operated while the symbol is stopped or when there is vibration detection that does not stop the game. Therefore, it can be expected to suppress unnecessary vibrations from being given to the gaming machine when the symbol is stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from performing an unnecessary performance and giving negative psychology. In addition, when a symbol is stopped, a lamp display indicating the symbol stop is often performed. Therefore, by not performing a touch effect overlapping with this display, the player can stop the symbol depending on the light emission mode of the lamp. It does not disturb recognition.

  In the above-mentioned “during reach”, when the touch detection is changed from “none” to “present” for the first time, any touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are not executed. Also, after touch detection has changed from “No” to “Yes” for the first time, a change in the touch state is detected again (in the case of a predetermined number of times or later), and after a production button is operated, etc. Even in the case of “reach” under the conditions, no touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are executed.

  On the other hand, when touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, the effects of “Image”, “Sound”, and “Lamp” are provided on condition that other effects during the reach are not affected. Control to perform both. Furthermore, after a change in touch detection from “present” to “absent” for the first time, if a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times), “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are displayed. None of the touch effects used are executed, and during “reach” under certain conditions, such as after an effect button is operated, the image is subject to the condition that there is no effect on other effects performed during reach. “,” “Voice” and “lamp” are controlled to be executed.

  In this way, at the time of reach, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes”, the touch effect is not executed. In general, it is possible to perform an appropriate touch effect corresponding to a situation where a player is firing (a situation where touch detection is “present”). On the other hand, when the reach occurs, the result of the reach becomes the player's greatest interest, so the player may let go of the handle. For this reason, when the operation is performed, in response to the operation, an effect related to reliability is executed, or an effect or the like indicating that it is not disadvantageous if the player keeps firing is performed. With this configuration, it can be expected that a new gaming essence is added to the handle operation (touch) at the time of reach. Of course, it is possible to expect the effect of improving the operation of the gaming machine simply by executing the effect that prompts the launch to continue, and the configuration is made so that the execution result of the effect is determined by reflecting the reach result By doing so, the playability can be further enhanced.

In the above-mentioned “specific production”, the touch detection changed from “No” to “Yes” for the first time when touch detection changed from “No” to “Yes” for the first time, as in the case of “Reach”. Later, both when the change of the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times) and when “specific effect is being performed” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed, No touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are executed.

  On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, it is confirmed that, as with “Reach” described above, there is no effect on other effects performed during “Specific Effect”. Control is performed so as to perform any of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” as conditions. Furthermore, after a change in touch detection from “present” to “absent” for the first time, if a change in the touch state is detected again (after a predetermined number of times), “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are displayed. Do not perform any of the touch effects used, and during “specific effects” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect buttons, there is no effect on other effects performed during “specific effects” Control is performed to execute any effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” as conditions.

  In this way, in the case of “during specific production”, as in the case of “reach”, when the touch detection changes from “none” to “present”, the design is made so that the touch production is not executed. During the “specific effect” during the change, it is possible to perform an appropriate touch effect corresponding to a situation where the player is generally firing (a situation where touch detection is “present”). On the other hand, during the “specific production”, the result of the symbol variation becomes the player's greatest interest, so the player may let go of the handle. For this reason, when the operation is performed, it is disadvantageous to perform an effect related to reliability, for example, in response to the operation (corresponding to a change in touch detection), or to continue firing by the player. By configuring so as to perform an effect indicating that it does not occur, it can be expected that a new gaming essence is added to the handle operation (touch) at the time of the specific effect. Of course, the effect of improving the operation of the gaming machine can be expected simply by executing an effect that prompts to continue firing, and the execution result of the effect is determined by reflecting the result of the change. By configuring, the playability can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned “abnormal display screen”, when the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” for the first time, the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes”, and then the touch detection is again set to “No”. ”To“ Yes ”, control is performed to produce“ sound ”on the condition that there is no effect on other productions performed on the“ abnormal display screen ”, while“ image ”and“ lamp ” Is controlled so as not to be executed. Further, control is performed so that any of the “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” effects are not executed during “design stop” under a specific condition such as after the effect button is operated.

  On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, the “sound” effect is performed on the condition that there is no influence on other effects performed at the “abnormal display screen”. On the other hand, control is performed so that the touch effect of “image” and “lamp” is not executed. Furthermore, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”, and then the touch detection changes again from “Yes” to “No” for a predetermined number of times (for example, two times or more), and the operation of the effect button is performed. In the case of an “abnormal display screen” under a specific condition such as after, control is performed so as not to execute any touch effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp”.

In this way, during the “abnormal display screen”, when the touch detection changes from “none” to “present”, it is not a situation in which the player is disadvantaged when the launch is stopped during the abnormality. Sometimes, it is possible to prevent a game from being inadvertently continued in an abnormal state by executing a touch effect that informs the user that the steering wheel operation is not performed because of an abnormality. In the present embodiment, the priority of the abnormality notification and the touch effect is taken into consideration, and the touch effect is executed only for voice output. In the case of a situation where the player is disadvantaged when the launch is stopped during the abnormality, a notification is made that the launch will be maintained if the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”. If the game is in a state where the stop of the launch is disadvantageous to the player, the game is prevented from being inadvertently stopped by the effect. be able to.
<<< During hits >>>

  Among the above-mentioned “game machine states”, “during hit” can include “during start demonstration”, “during round”, “between rounds”, “during specific production”, and “during end demonstration”. . Among these, “at the start demonstration” means a situation where a start demonstration of the jackpot game is being executed, and “during round” means a unit game that opens the jackpot of the jackpot device 90 in the jackpot game. Is a situation where is done.

  In addition, “between rounds” means a situation between “during round” and the next “during round”, and “during specific production” This means that the production is being executed. Furthermore, “during end demonstration” means a situation where an end demo of the big hit game is being executed.

  Of these, at the time of “Start Demo”, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” for the first time, the “Audio” The control is performed so as to perform the effect “” while the effect “image” and “lamp” is not executed. In addition, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” and then the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” again, and after the operation of the production button is performed, “Start” In the case of “demo”, control is performed so as not to execute any effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp”.

  On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, the touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No”, and then the touch detection is again set from “Yes” to “No”. When the number of times has changed more than once (for example, two times or more), control is performed such that none of the “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” touch effects are executed. Furthermore, in the case of “starting demonstration” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the production buttons, the “image” touch production is not executed, and the “voice” and “lamp” touch production is performed under the predetermined conditions. Control to do.

  In this way, during the “starting demonstration”, when the touch detection changes from “none” to “present”, for example, depending on the content of the big hit, the number of symbol changes up to the big hit, etc. By constructing such an effect that congratulates a big hit with “voice” such as “Congratulations!”, It is possible to execute an effect associating the game process with the resumption of firing. Also, if the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” when the start timing of the big hit game with the entity is approaching, such as the end game in the “Start Demo”, etc. If it is not, it will be changed to “playing state that will be disadvantageous” soon, or it will be configured to perform touch production with “voice” or “ramp” that suggests the launch position like “Please turn right!” Thus, when the hand is released from the firing handle at an inappropriate timing, it is possible to notify that the firing operation is performed as a touch effect as necessary.

  In the above-mentioned “during round”, when touch detection is changed from “none” to “present” for the first time, any touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are not executed. Also, after touch detection has changed from “No” to “Yes” for the first time, a change in the touch state is detected again (in the case of a predetermined number of times or later), and after a production button is operated, etc. Even during “round” under the condition, no touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are executed.

  On the other hand, when touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, and after touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, a change in touch state is detected again. In the case of the predetermined number of times or later, no touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are executed. Furthermore, during “round” under certain conditions such as after the operation button is operated, “image”, “sound” and “lamp” are provided on condition that there is no effect on other effects performed during “round”. Control is performed so as to perform any of the effects.

  Thus, “during a round” means that a game that is disadvantageous if it is not fired only when the touch detection changes from “present” to “no” under certain conditions, for example, immediately after the start of the round. Inappropriate by configuring the touch production with “speech” or “lamp” that suggests a “state” or “launch right”! When the hand is released from the firing handle at the timing, it is possible to notify that the firing operation is performed as a touch effect as necessary.

  In the above-mentioned “between rounds”, when the touch detection is changed from “none” to “present” for the first time, as in the above “during start demonstration”, it affects other performances performed “between rounds”. On the condition that there is no sound, the control is performed so that the “sound” effect is performed, while the “image” and “lamp” effects are not executed. In addition, when the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes”, and then the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” again, and after the production button is operated, “Round” In the case of “between”, control is performed so as not to execute any effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp”.

  On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, the touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No”, and then the touch detection is again set from “Yes” to “No”. When the number of times has changed more than once (for example, two times or more), control is performed so as not to execute any touch effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” as in the above-mentioned “during start demonstration”. Furthermore, in the case of “between rounds” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect buttons, the “image” touch effect is not executed, and the “voice” and “lamp” touch effects are controlled. To do.

  As described above, when “touch detection” is changed from “none” to “present” at a predetermined timing (for example, timing immediately before the start of the next round) in “between rounds”, a touch effect by “voice” is executed. For example, when the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” at the timing, a blessing effect such as “Nice!” Is executed by “Voice”. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “none” at a specific timing in a specific “between rounds” (for example, between rounds in which the time until the start of the next round is longer than usual), “voice” For example, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” at an early timing when the round is long, “Nice!” Is set by “Voice”. Blessing production like this is executed. In this way, providing an opportunity to improve a player's skill by executing an effect related to the game (according to the skill) according to the situation such as the period between rounds and the change state of the touch detection Can do.

  In the above-mentioned “specific production”, as in the above “between rounds”, when the touch detection is changed from “none” to “present” for the first time, On the condition that there is no influence, control is performed so that the “sound” effect is performed, while the “image” and “lamp” effects are not executed. In addition, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” and then the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” again, and after the operation of the production button is performed, In the case of “during production”, control is performed so that any production of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” is not executed.

  On the other hand, when touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, and after touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, a change in touch state is detected again. In the case of (after the predetermined number of times), the touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are not executed as in the above “during round”. Furthermore, “during specific production” under a specific condition such as after the operation of the production button does not affect other productions performed during “specific production” (for example, touch detection during a specific production period) It is within the reception period), or it is controlled to perform all the “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” effects on the condition of winning the effect execution lottery.

  In this way, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” at a predetermined timing of “during specific production” (for example, timing after notification of the result in the promotion production or the consecutive resort announcement production), “voice” is used. For example, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” at the timing, “Lucky!” Or “Sorry!” Depending on the notification result by “voice”. A production like this is executed. On the other hand, if the touch detection changes from “presence” to “no” at a predetermined timing of “during a specific production” (for example, input waiting timing in a promotion production or a villa announcement production), the “production button” It is configured to notify the user of the result of a specific effect by “production”, “sound”, and “lamp”, for example, while the instruction “Press the button!” During the promotion effect is displayed. When the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, an effect corresponding to the result of the specific effect is executed. In this way, by performing a touch effect according to the result of the specific effect, or by using an effect execution trigger as an alternative to other inputs during the specific effect, it is preferable to change the touch operation during the specific effect in the hit game You can make use of it.

  In the above-mentioned “during demonstration”, similar to the above “during specific production”, when the touch detection changes from “none” to “present” for the first time, other productions performed at “during demonstration” Control is performed so that the “sound” effect is performed on the condition that there is no influence on the image, while the “image” and “lamp” effects are not executed. Also, when the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” and then the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” again, and after the operation of the production button is performed, “End” In the case of “demo”, control is performed so as not to execute any effects of “image”, “sound”, and “lamp”.

  On the other hand, when touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, and after touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No” for the first time, a change in touch state is detected again. In the case of (after the predetermined number of times), the touch effects using “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” are not executed as in the above “during round”. Furthermore, at the “end demonstration” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the production buttons, “image”, “sound”, “ Control is performed so that all effects of “lamp” are performed.

As described above, when the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” at a predetermined timing of “During End Demo” (for example, timing immediately before the end of the End Demo), the touch effect by “Voice” is executed. For example, when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” at the timing, an effect such as “Please do your best!” Is executed according to the notification result by “Voice”. The On the other hand, if the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” at a predetermined timing of “During End Demo” (for example, the timing immediately after the start of the End Demo), “Direction”, “Voice”, “Ramp” For example, when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “None” at this timing, this jackpot is like “I got a lot of balls this time!” The production related to “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” is executed. As described above, by executing the touch effect according to the timing during the end demonstration, it is possible to suitably link the winning game and the change of the touch operation during the end demonstration.
<<< During probability change (electric support) >>>

  Among “the state of gaming machine” described above, “during probability change (electric support)” can include “during symbol stop”, “during reach”, “during specific production”, and “abnormal display screen”. These situations can have the same meaning as the respective situations assumed in the above-described “design changing” state. In the example of FIG. 24B, when the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” and when “Yes” is changed to “No”, “Number of changes” is “First time”. , “Image”, “Sound”, and “Ramp” are produced in the “design changing” state shown in FIG. It is defined in the same way as the production (with the same content).

  In addition, the state of the gaming machine was determined in the same manner as the above “during symbol fluctuation” for normal (non-electric support) for “probability change (electric support)” so that the explanation is not complicated here. However, as a difference between the symbol change (not shown in FIG. 24) related to “probability change (electric support)” and the “design change change” related to the normal time, It can be mentioned that the state does not shift to the “medium” state. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine a gaming state different from “during symbol change” according to the normal time, for example, depending on factors such as the contents of effects to be implemented and differences in control modes.

<< Direction type >>
As described above, the execution state of the production by “image”, “sound”, “lamp” is explained according to the state of the gaming machine, the change method of touch detection, the number of changes, etc. Based on the concept of “execution of production”, it is possible to adopt various aspects such as what has been explained so far and what has not been explained in terms of “what kind of production to perform”. Is possible. Therefore, in the following, the effect types suitable as effects executed in the above situation will be described in more detail with some examples.

FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 summarize the more specific types of effects as a list when changes in the touch state are detected in various gaming states.

  FIG. 25 shows, from the left side of the chart, “types of effects executed when the detection state changes”, “setting change relationship”, “game waiting”, and “symbol changing”. Further, FIG. 26 shows “types of effects to be executed when the detection state changes”, “during hit”, and “probability change (electric support)” from the left of the chart. In FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, “setting change relationship”, “game waiting”, “design changing”, “during hit”, “probable change (electric support)” indicate the state of the gaming machine. This means the same classification as shown in FIG. 24A and FIG.

  Of the items shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, “Type of effect to be executed when the detection state changes” changes from “Yes” to “Yes” when touch detection is changed from “No” to “No”. This is a list of types of effects that can be performed. As shown in FIG. 25, the types of effects belonging to “the type of effects to be executed when the detection state changes” include “transition to other mode (effect)”, “effect related to character”, “game” "Promotion that promotes", "Direction that keeps the end of the game", "Direction related to RTC", "Direction related to prevention of withdrawal", "Direction related to prevention of card removal", "Direction such as game description", "Game results" Notification effect ”and“ touch notification ”.

  These types of effects are examples in which various effects are comprehensively classified based on functions and attributes. The type of effect is not limited to the categories listed here, but other categories can also be adopted. In addition, types other than the types listed here may be provided. Furthermore, the various types are not always considered to be clearly separated, and for example, it can be considered that a certain effect can be classified into a plurality of types.

  Of the various types described above, “transition to other mode (production)” can also be referred to as, for example, “production of other modes”. “Transition to other mode (production)” is such that the production mode changes to a different production mode when the touch detection state changes from “none” to “present” (or “present” to “none”). Means something. Further, the “production mode” is, for example, a (production) format / form that depends upon the determination of production display contents such as a notice production and a reach production. It can be said that it is specified by the difference in data code. As examples of the types of effect modes, stages A to Z at normal time, stages a to g at probability change (electric support), and the like can be given.

  In the aforementioned “character-related effects”, when the touch detection state changes from “absent” to “present” (or “presented” to “absent”), an effect using the character is started or the character is used. It means something that changes the contents of the production. In addition, the above-mentioned “promotion to promote the game” is something that advances the story on the production, develops the content of the production, or executes the button production according to the change in the state of the touch detection. I mean. Here, as described above, it is possible to classify the effects using the character into both “effects related to the character” and “effects that promote the game”.

  Further, specific examples of “effects related to characters” include those in which elements of effects related to a motif of effects appear or change based on touch detection. More specifically, for example, “Martian”, “Meteorite”, “Spaceship”, etc. when the gaming machine has a space motif, or “Battery” or “Doctor” when a robot is a motif. Alternatively, “weapons”, “armor”, and the like in the battle production may appear in the story based on touch detection, or existing production elements may be changed to these elements.

  The above-mentioned “production to hold the end of the game” means something that can be expected to act to discourage the player from ending the game and leaving the gaming machine based on the change in the state of touch detection. doing. For example, an effect (limited frequency pattern effect) executed using the above-described limited frequency pattern table can be considered to be included in this “effect to hold the game end”. Furthermore, an effect that develops the middle of a series of stories can be considered as included in the “effect that keeps the game finished”.

  For this “production to end the game”, messages such as “Please keep a little more!”, “Do n’t quit!”, “I do n’t know even if I ’m dug up” are displayed. Etc. can be exemplified. In addition, when using the limited frequency pattern table as described above, a predetermined limited frequency pattern table is selected in response to touch detection, and a unique unusual effect appears frequently in subsequent games. Or, if it is normal, it is possible to make it easy for appearances with a low appearance frequency to appear.

  The above-mentioned “RTC-related production” means something that is performed based on real time using an RTC (real time clock). For example, an effect such as that described above as “E121: RTC” can be considered to correspond to this “RTC-related effect”. In addition, for example, an effect performed using RTC, for example, an effect performed by deciding the due date or season, an effect performed by deciding a time zone of the day, an effect performed simultaneously by a plurality of pachinko machines, etc. It can be exemplified as “RTC-related effects”.

  The above-mentioned “production of prevention-related relationship” means content that prevents the player from excessively concentrating on the game. For example, it is possible to think of something that produces “images” and “sounds” accompanied by messages such as “Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately” and “Let's be careful about being caught up”.

  The above-mentioned “effects related to forgetting to remove a card” means that the player does not forget to take out various cards from the card unit. For example, it is possible to think of something that produces “images” and “sounds” accompanied by messages such as “Let's forget to remove cards” and “Please remember to remove cards”.

  The above-mentioned “production such as a game description” means an item for explaining the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 10 or environment setting such as volume. For example, it can be considered that the type of jackpot and the degree of expectation (hit probability), the type of effect mode, the introduction of characters appearing, the display of the environment setting menu, etc. are displayed as the effect of “image”.

  The aforementioned “notification effect regarding game results” means notification effects of game results such as determination of success / failure and types of jackpots. For example, the notification effect of the result which concerns on the fluctuation | variation at the time (the said fluctuation | variation) can be illustrated. In this case, as will be described later, it is conceivable that the “notification effect regarding the game result” is not performed during the “game waiting” in FIG. In addition, as the “notification effect on the game result”, the transition of the ball and the number of big hits of the pachinko gaming machine 10 on that day, the number of big hits and the number of acquired balls during the probability change and the electric support, etc. as the effects of “image” It is also possible to display.

  The above-described “touch notification” means performing notification that a touch operation has been performed. Here, as “touch notification”, in a broad sense, when a touch detection is detected, a predetermined effect is started, and there is a change in the effect. However, “touch notification” shown in FIG. 25 means that notification of a touch operation (touch detection) has been performed. As “touch notification”, for example, “ For example, a character display such as “There was a touch operation” or a voice display, or a predetermined lamp (LED) is lit.

  An effect other than “touch notification” can be an effect that is executed regardless of whether or not a touch is detected. Examples of effects other than “touch notification” include, for example, a notice during a symbol change, an effect during a big hit, an effect used during a demonstration, and the like.

In the example of FIG. 25, “dedicated” and “shared” types are further provided for various types of “effects related to characters” to “touch notification” described so far. Among these, “dedicated” is provided for each of “character-related effects” to “touch notification”, and “character-related effects” based on touch detection is an effect other than “touch notification”. Means a production that is not used. “Shared” means an effect that is also used as an effect other than “touch notification” from “character related effect” based on touch detection.
<<< Setting change relationship >>>

  Of the various gaming machine states shown in FIG. 25, the above-mentioned “setting change relationship” includes states of “setting change” and “setting display” as in the example of FIG. Yes. Here, the situation represented by “setting change in progress” and “setting display in progress” is the same as in the example of FIG. In the examples shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the symbols “◯”, “Δ”, and “×” are also used, and the meaning of these symbols is “○” as in the example of FIG. “Represents execution”, “Δ” represents “preferable or possible to execute under certain conditions”, and “x” represents “unpreferable or difficult to execute”.

  Among these, “Δ” indicates the effectiveness with some conditions, but it is possible to adopt a control mode that is executed for any effect. Furthermore, although “x” is not preferable or difficult to execute, it is possible to adopt a control mode that is executed intentionally. In the examples shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the symbol “−” is used, and this symbol “−” indicates that it is not a target of assignment of effects.

  In the “setting change relation” state shown in FIG. 25, “setting change” or “setting display” is displayed, so the touch detection shown at the left end in the figure is changed from “none” to “present”. In the case, “Transition to other mode (production)” is not executed (×). Further, “notification effect relating to game result” from “effect related to character” is “−” described above for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  The “dedicated” effect related to the “touch notification” described above is suitable or possible to execute (△) under certain conditions in both “setting change” and “setting display”. The production of “shared” is determined to be unpreferable or difficult to execute (×) in both cases of “setting change” and “setting display”.

  Regarding the state of this “setting change relationship”, even when the touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No”, the touch detection described above is changed from “No” to “Direction related to the character” to “Touch notification”. As in the case of “Yes”, an arrangement relating to the type of effect is made.

  In addition, as indicated by “△” in “setting change relationship” in “gaming machine state” in FIG. 24A, only “ramp” effects can be executed in the “setting change relationship” state. There is sex. In FIG. 25, “△” indicates that the effect of “touch notification” executed in the “setting change relationship” state is a dedicated effect for notifying touch detection using a lamp. . On the other hand, since it is an effect using a lamp, various effects such as “an effect related to a character”, “an effect that promotes a game”, or “an effect that retains the end of a game” cannot be executed. “-”, Which is not subject to the regulation here, is shown.

In accordance with these agreements, the “△” item (in this case, “dedicated” “touch notification” effect) does not interfere with the display in the “setting change” or “setting display” state. An effect can be executed in a suppressed manner. Also, the item “x” (here, “shared” “touch notification”) is not executed. Here, as an effect of “dedicated” “touch notification”, character display of “setting change” and “setting display” can be performed at the bottom of the screen.
<<< Waiting for games >>>

  Subsequently, examples of the “game standby” state include “demo screen”, “adjustment screen”, “variation standby screen”, “initialization notification”, and “abnormality notification”. These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. In the “demo screen” (during display) in “waiting for game”, “transition to other mode (effect)” is preferably executed when touch detection is changed from “none” to “present”. It is said to be a thing (○). Furthermore, the “effect related to the character” and the “effect that promotes the game” are preferably executed (◯) for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  In addition, regarding the case where touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes”, “Effort to retain game end” is not preferable or difficult to execute for both “Dedicated” and “Shared” (×) It is said that. In addition, “RTC-related effects” and “reduction prevention-related effects” are preferably executed for both “dedicated” and “shared” (○). The “production” is set to be suitable or possible (Δ) for both “dedicated” and “shared” execution under certain conditions.

  Among these, “△” for “card forgetting card-related effects” is based on the following idea. In other words, the “effects related to forgetting to remove a card” is preferably performed when there is a high possibility of leaving, such as at the end of a game, so when touch detection is changed from “none” to “present” The effect of the production is considered to be small. On the other hand, for example, after the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, the execution of the touch effect is allowed, but it does not pass for a certain period of time (in the case of a short time away) or the like. For the time being, since it is considered that there is a certain effect to perform related effects such as “Have you forgotten to take the card?” May be. Therefore, regarding “the effect of preventing card removal”, it is preferable (Δ) to be able to be executed under certain conditions.

  Also, “game description etc.” is “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “notification for game results” is “dedicated” because no corresponding notification is given. , “Shared” is defined as “−” in which no agreement is made. Furthermore, “touch notification” is “◯” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  In addition, regarding the case where the touch detection is changed from “present” to “none” in the “demo screen”, “transfer to other mode (effect)” is set to “x”. In addition, when touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), since the corresponding notification is not performed, both “dedicated” and “shared” are negotiated. "-" That is not subject to.

  Subsequently, in the “adjustment screen” (while the game is on standby) (while the game is being displayed), when “touch” is changed from “none” to “present”, “transition from other mode (production)” to “game” "Promotion for promoting" is "△". In addition, the “direction to hold the game end” is “×” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and the “RTC-related performance” is “dedicated” and “shared”. △ ”.

  Here, “△” meaning “conditional” for “RTC-related effects” and “◯” meaning “execution is preferable for“ touch notification ”are as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), for the “adjustment screen” of “waiting for game”, the “image” effect is not executed, but the “sound” effect (the “lamp” effect is provided with conditions). (Combined use). In this way, the “adjustment screen” for “waiting for game” is limited to “lamp” and “sound” other than “image”, so priority is given to “touch notification” and “RTC related” The priority of “production” is set lower than “touch notification”.

  In addition, from “production related to prevention of recreation” to “production of game explanations”, “exclusive” and “shared” are both “×”, and “notification production regarding game results” is applicable. Since there is no notification, both “dedicated” and “shared” are “−”. Furthermore, “touch notification” is “◯” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  As for the “adjustment screen”, “transfer to another mode (effect)” is set to “x” when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”. Furthermore, as described above (refer to FIG. 24 if necessary), “touch notification” from the other “character-related effects” is not performed, so that “dedicated” and “shared” are both “ -". In this way, in the “adjustment screen” in “waiting for game”, only when the touch detection is changed from “none” to “present”, an effect that indicates touch notification to the extent that adjustment work is not affected, and game promotion The production related to is limitedly executed.

  Subsequently, on the “variable standby screen” (while the game is on standby), the “transition to other mode (effect)” is “×” when the touch detection is changed from “none” to “present”. It is said that. Furthermore, the “character-related effects” and “game-promoting effects” are both “exclusive” and “shared”, and the “effects that hold the end of the game” are “dedicated”. , “Shared” is “×”.

  In addition, “RTC-related effects” and “reduction prevention-related effects” are both “exclusive” and “shared”, and “card removal forgotten prevention-related effects” are “ Both “dedicated” and “shared” are indicated as “△”. Furthermore, the “game description etc. effect” is “O” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and the “notification effect regarding the game result” is “ Both “dedicated” and “shared” are “−”. The “touch notification” is “◯” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Of these, the “effects related to forgetting to remove cards” are those that are suitable or possible to execute under certain conditions (△). This is because the situation where the effect of performing the production is considered to be large is limited to a case where a short time away from the seat or the like.

  Subsequently, as the “variable standby screen” of “variable standby”, “transition to other mode (production)” is set to “△” when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “none”. Yes. In addition, the “effect related to the character” to the “effect to keep the game end” is “◯” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Here, regarding the case where the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, “transition to other mode (production)” is set to “△”, for example, when the player is on standby for variation If the user tries to leave the handle (20) and then leave the seat, it is not expected to improve the game's taste even if the player switches to another production mode. This is because it may be possible to have an intention to return to the seat. It is also possible to perform control such as returning to the default production mode (for example, the initial setting mode when the power is turned on or the production mode when the player selection related to the environment setting is not made) when leaving the seat. It is.

  In addition, “RTC-related production” is “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “reduction prevention-related production” is for both “dedicated” and “shared”. “×”. Furthermore, “Direction related to forgetting card removal” is set to “○” for both “Exclusive” and “Shared”, and “Direction for game description etc.” is either “Exclusive” or “Shared”. Is also marked “x”.

  Here, “RTC-related effects” is “dedicated” and “shared”, and “△” means that the touch effect depends on what kind of effect is adopted as the RTC extension. This is because it may be possible.

  In addition, since “notification effect regarding game result” is not notified on the “variation standby screen” as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), both “dedicated” and “shared” “-” Is set, and “touch notification” is set to “◯” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Subsequently, in “Initialization Notification” (medium) in “Waiting for Game”, when touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes”, when touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No” In any case, “Transition to other mode (production)” is set to “x”. Further, as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), the touch effect is not performed. This is due to the fact that there is a high possibility that no player is present during the initialization notification immediately after the power is turned on, and there is no point in performing the effect due to the change in touch detection.

  Subsequently, in “abnormality notification” (during display) in “waiting for game”, “transition to other mode (effect)” is “×” when touch detection is changed from “none” to “present”. It is said that. Furthermore, “effects related to characters” to “effects such as game explanations” are “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. On the other hand, “notification effect on game result” and “touch notification” are “△” executed under specific conditions for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

Further, in “abnormality notification” (during display), when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, “shift to other mode (effect)” is set to “x”. Further, as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), the touch effect is not performed. As described above, in the “abnormality notification” (during display) in “waiting for game”, only when the touch detection is changed from “none” to “present”, the touch notification is displayed to the extent that the adjustment work is not affected. It is supposed that the production and the notification production regarding the game result are limitedly executed.
<<< During design variation >>>

  Subsequently, examples of the “in design change” state include “in design stop”, “at reach”, “during specific production”, and “abnormal display screen”. These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. In “in the case of symbol change” in “in design change”, “transfer to another mode (effect)” is set to “x” in the case where touch detection is changed from “none” to “present”. Further, the “effect related to the character” is “△” for “dedicated” and “×” for “shared”.

  In this way, regarding the “character-related effects”, the “shared” effect is set to “x” to distinguish whether the effect is based on touch detection or the effect related to symbol variation when the shared effect is executed when the symbol is stopped. This is because it becomes impossible to produce the effect of the touch effect. Such a situation also applies to “at the time of reach”, “during specific production”, and “abnormal display screen” described below. For this reason, it is desirable to adopt a control mode in which the “character-related effects” in “in design fluctuation” is executed only under special conditions in many cases (for example, in the case of winning design change). it is conceivable that.

  In addition, the “promotion for promoting the game” is set to “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. Both “dedicated” and “shared” are “x”. In addition, “effects such as game description” is “△” for “dedicated” and “×” for “shared”. In addition, “notification effect on game results” is “×” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “touch notification” is “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. It is said that.

  More specifically, if the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes”, the player is considered to have a willingness to start (resume) the game in principle. While an effect that encourages the player is preferable, the “effect that holds the end of the game” and “the effect that prevents the card being forgotten” related to the end of the game are not preferable as the effect in the state of “when the symbol is stopped”. It can be said. For this reason, as described above, the “promotion of the game” is set to “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and from “the effect of deferring the end of the game” to “the effect of preventing card removal” “Dedicated” and “Shared” are both “×”.

  And as the “production that promotes the game” here, display characters and items to raise the expectation that the story on the production will move forward, or display characters of “Development?” Can be illustrated.

  Subsequently, in the case of “in the case of symbol change” in “in the case of symbol change”, “transition to other mode (effect)” is set to “x” in the case where the touch detection is changed from “present” to “none”. Yes. Further, the “effect related to the character” is “△” for “dedicated” and “×” for “shared”.

  In addition, “Direction that promotes the game” is “×” for both “Exclusive” and “Shared”, and “Direction that holds the end of the game” for both “Exclusive” and “Shared” “○”. Furthermore, “RTC-related effects” is “X” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “development prevention-related effects” is “dedicated”. , “Shared” is “△”.

In addition, “notification effect on game results” is “×” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “touch notification” is “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. It is said that.
In this way, if the touch detection changes from “None” to “Yes” in “During symbol change” in “During symbol change”, the effect or game that indicates touch notification is promoted under certain conditions. On the other hand, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, the effect that mainly holds the end of the game is executed. Thereby, it can be said that the influence on the player who uses the symbol stop as a reference for the end of the game can be expected.

  In addition, in the case of “reaching” in “design change” and “during specific production”, “transition to other mode (production)” is “ X ”. Of the “notification effects relating to game results”, “shared” is set to “Δ”, and other effects are set to “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Furthermore, regarding the case where the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, “shift to another mode (effect)” is set to “x”. Further, the “effect related to the character” is “△” for “dedicated” and “×” for “shared”. In addition, “effects for promoting games” to “effects such as game explanations” are “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Further, “notification effect on game result” is “△” for “dedicated” and “×” for “shared”. “Touch notification” is “X” for “dedicated” and “△” for “shared”.

  In this way, certain conditions are met when the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” or from “Yes” to “No” during “Reach” or “Specific production” in “During design change”. In addition to the effects that are in the process of changing the symbols due to changes in touch detection, the notification effects on the game results that are difficult to be confused with the effects at the time of changing the symbols are added. can do.

  In addition, on the “abnormal display screen” (during display) for “during symbol change”, when touch detection changes from “none” to “present”, or when touch detection changes from “present” to “none” In any case, “Transition to other mode (production)” is set to “x”. In addition, when touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes”, “Dedicated” and “Shared” effects of touch notification may be executed under certain conditions. For other effects, since the corresponding notification is not performed, both “dedicated” and “shared” are set to “−”.

In this way, in the “abnormal display screen” (during display) in “in design fluctuation”, when touch detection is changed from “none” to “present”, only touch notification is performed under certain conditions. Can be executed, but other effects are not executed. Thereby, it can be said that when the abnormality occurs, it is possible to prevent the entertainment from being lost without inadvertently performing effects such as game promotion.
<<< During hits >>>

  Subsequently, examples of the “during hit” state may include “during start demonstration”, “during round”, “between rounds”, “during specific production”, and “during end demonstration”. These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. When the touch detection is changed from “None” to “Yes” or “Touch detection” is changed from “Yes” to “None” during “Start Demo” (when the Start Demo is displayed) In any case, “Transition to other mode (production)” is set to “x”. In addition, “production related to character” and “production that promotes the game” are “◯” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  In addition, the “direction to hold the game end” is “×” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and the “RTC related performance” is “dedicated” and “shared”. △ ”. In addition, “Prevention related to prevention of withdrawal” is set to “X” for both “Exclusive” and “Shared”, and “Direction related to prevention of card removal” is “Dedicated” and “Shared”. In both cases, “△” is indicated.

  Furthermore, “game description and other effects” and “game result notification effects” are both “exclusive” and “shared”, and “touch notification” is “dedicated” and “shared”. "Is marked" △ ".

  In this way, during the “starting demonstration” in “during hit” (when the starting demo is being displayed), it will not be confused with the effects of changing the symbol, so the game can be promoted regardless of whether it is shared or dedicated, By executing the effects related to the character, it is possible to expect an effect of increasing the blissful time for the player as a big hit. Also, in such a situation, it is related to the end of the game that the player has no possibility of selecting, and by performing an effect that retains the end of the game, it is possible to prevent water from being poured into the interest of the player It is possible.

  In addition, in “during round” in “winning”, “other” is the case for both touch detection from “none” to “present” and touch detection from “present” to “none”. "Transition to mode (production)" is "x". In addition, “effects related to characters” to “effects such as game explanations” are “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. On the other hand, “notification effect on game result” and “touch notification” are “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  In this way, in the “round” in “during hit”, since the fire is continuously performed (the touch detection is maintained in the “present” state), the minimum necessary touch detection notification or in the round In the notification effect screen, it is possible to perform effects limited to alternative functions such as when a hand that does not hold the handle cannot be used, and the range that does not hinder launching that is the essence of the game It can be said that the effect setting at the time of an appropriate touch is realized.

  Furthermore, in “between rounds” in “winning”, each production type is different for the case where touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” and the case where touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No”. The execution mode is determined in the same manner (with the same contents) as in the above-mentioned “during round”.

  In addition, as “in the middle of a specific effect” in “winning”, in both cases where the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” and the touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No”, “ “Transition to other mode (production)” is set to “x”. In addition, “effects related to characters” to “effects such as game explanations” are “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. Furthermore, “notification effect on game results” is “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “touch notification” is “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. It is said that.

  In this way, during “specific production” in “during hit”, as in “during round”, etc., it is continuously fired (touch detection is maintained in the “present” state). In the notification effect screen, it is possible to execute an effect limited to alternative functions such as when a hand that does not hold the handle cannot be used, and it does not hinder the launch that is performed during the hit, which is the essence of the game It can be said that it is possible to realize the effect setting at the time of an appropriate touch while keeping the effect in the range.

  Furthermore, during “End Demonstration” (when the end demo is being displayed) in “Congratulations”, “Transition to other mode (production)” is “ X ”. Also, “character-related effects” to “RTC-related effects” are “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. “Prevention-related effects” is “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Furthermore, “game description and other effects” are “×” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “notification effects regarding game results” are both “dedicated” and “shared”. “○”. The “touch notification” is “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Furthermore, regarding the case where the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, “shift to another mode (effect)” is set to “x”. In addition, the “character-related effects” to “RTC-related effects” are both “exclusive” and “shared” and “×”, and “reduction prevention related effects” are “dedicated”. , “Shared” is “△”.

  Furthermore, “Direction related to forgetting card removal” is set to “○” for both “Exclusive” and “Shared”, and “Direction for game description etc.” is either “Exclusive” or “Shared”. Is also marked “△”. In addition, “notification effect on game results” is “○” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “touch notification” is “△” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. It is said that.

In this way, at the time of “end demo” (when the end demo is being displayed) in the “winning” state, touch detection is “nothing” in consideration of the possibility of leaving the game or quitting the game when the big hit ends. It is preferable to execute a game result (for example, information relating to the gaming state after the end of the big hit), an effect to prevent forgetting to remove the card, or the like. In addition, when the game content after the big hit ends is complicated, when touch detection becomes “None”, it is possible to provide an opportunity to grasp the game content by displaying an explanation about the subsequent game content, etc. It can be said that it is preferable.
<<< During probability change (electric support) >>>

  Subsequently, examples of the state of “probability change (electric support) being in progress” include “at the time of symbol stop”, “at the time of reach”, “during specific production”, and “abnormal display screen”. These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. And, regarding the case where the touch detection is changed from “No” to “Yes” and the case where the touch detection is changed from “Yes” to “No”, the execution mode of each effect type is the “symbol variation” described above. It is determined in the same manner (with the same contents) as “Medium” (FIG. 25).

  Here, the following can be said about the specific gaming state such as during probability change or during electric support. For example, it may be desirable not to enter a demo state (normal demo state in which the standby screen A is displayed here) during probability change or during electric support. In this way, the transition to the game standby state (normal demo state) can be premised on a low probability and low base state (non-probable and non-electric support state), It is easy to specialize in production from the viewpoint of "game start". In other words, it is possible to produce a touch effect as highlighting the content indicating “game start” from a low probability and low base state.

  In addition, it can be said that it is preferable not to execute the firing detection effect (touch effect) in a non-variable state (which can be said to be a standby state in a specific game state) during the probability change or the electric support. However, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are possible. In the example described so far, the adjustment button (FIG. 33 (c)) is displayed by operating the effect buttons (the operation buttons 22 and the like) during the demonstration screen (in the normal demonstration state in which the standby screen A is displayed here). In this state, volume adjustment, brightness (light quantity) adjustment, and the like are performed. And even if it is a situation that does not normally shift to the adjustment screen, such as a situation in a state other than that in the demonstration screen, if it is a predetermined state, it may be possible to shift to the adjustment screen by operating the effect button. . Examples of the “predetermined state” here include a gaming state in which the use of the effect buttons used for adjustment is not scheduled. More specifically, for example, while the standby screen B is being displayed, during symbol variation, or during a big hit game. In addition, the “predetermined state” may be a state in which it is not questioned whether the state is a probable variation state or the electric support state during fluctuation.

  Further, the above-described adjustment meter is also displayed on the adjustment screen (FIG. 33C) displayed under such conditions. In addition, the display priority (display priority) of the adjustment screen in this situation is based on the decorative symbols (production symbols 190a to 190c) and the hold display area (the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197). May be higher or lower. Further, on the adjustment screen displayed while satisfying the above-mentioned “predetermined state” condition, the display of the adjustment meter as described above is, for example, an image object with a simplified design than the example of FIG. A simple image) may be used. This is because it is suitable when the necessity of other displays is higher. Note that the above-described simple image is displayed on a normal adjustment screen, for example, only the volume adjustment meter or the light amount adjustment meter is displayed relatively small on the screen, or displayed semi-transparently. It is desirable that the visibility is lower than the case.

Even on the adjustment screen displayed under such conditions, it is possible to adjust the volume, the amount of light, and the like by using the cross key (96). In order to display the adjustment screen (including the simple image), for example, in addition to the control mode in which the adjustment screen (simple image) is displayed by pressing the operation button (22) during the change, the operation button (22) during the change is displayed. It is possible to employ a control mode in which the cross key (96) is directly operated without pressing. As a specific example, when the cross key (96) is operated while the adjustment screen (simple image) is not displayed, the adjustment screen (simple image) is displayed and the cross key (96) is displayed during the display. 96) is additionally operated, and the volume and light amount can be adjusted. In addition, when the cross key (96) is operated while the adjustment screen (simple image) is not displayed, the adjustment screen (simple image) is displayed and both the volume and light amount are adjusted. (The display of the adjustment screen and the adjustment of the volume or the amount of light are performed together by a single cross key operation). In addition, even if touch detection and these operations are performed at the same time, the respective processes may be performed at the same time. In this case, the touch effect is changed so as not to affect the recognition of the adjustment result by the player. May be output.
<Second and subsequent regulations>

  27 (a) and 27 (b) relate to the “right or wrong of production” shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b). 27 (a) and 27 (b) relate to the “after a predetermined number” of “the number of changes” related to touch detection, and the “change state” is the second time for the effects that can be executed for the first time. It is shown whether or not the production is restricted in the subsequent cases.

  Specifically, FIGS. 27A and 27B show “setting change relation”, “game waiting”, “symbol changing”, “ The rules regarding the production of each state of “medium” and “medium change (electric support)” are shown. Further, for these states, the presence / absence of execution related to “the effect changing function based on the effect button operation” and “the effect by touch detection” is defined. That is, whether or not there is a production restriction in each state of the gaming machine with respect to the detection state change after the second time related to the effect button (operation button 22 or the like) and the detection state change after the second time related to touch detection to the firing handle 20. Is stipulated.

  In FIGS. 27A and 27B, “regulated” is indicated by a symbol “◯”, and “not regulated” is indicated by a symbol “x”. Further, the symbol “Δ” indicates that the information is further subdivided according to the situation (“by case”).

  For example, when the state of the gaming machine is “setting change” of “setting change relationship” and “setting display”, the “effect changing function based on the effect button operation” and “by touch detection” In this case, the production regulation for “production etc.” is “x”.

  In addition, when the state of the gaming machine is “waiting for game”, the “demo screen”, “adjustment screen”, “variation standby screen”, “initialization notification”, “abnormality notification” are the same as described above. Is provided. In this case, the production regulation for the “production change function based on the production button operation” is “×”. In addition, for “production by touch detection”, the “demo screen” is “◯”, the “adjustment screen” is “△”, the “variation standby screen” is “○”, and the “initialization notification” is “△”. “Abnormality notification” is “×”.

  Subsequently, for the case where the state of the gaming machine is “in design fluctuation”, “symbol stop”, “reach”, “during specific production”, and “abnormal display screen” are provided as described above. ing. In this case, the production regulation for the “production change function based on the production button operation” is “×”. In addition, for “production by touch detection”, “when symbol stops” is “△”, “when reaching” is “○”, “during specific production” is “○”, and “abnormal display screen” is “×”. "

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the state of the gaming machine is “winning”, “when starting demonstration”, “during round”, “between rounds”, “ “During specific production” and “During demonstration” are provided. In this case, the production regulation for the “production change function based on the production button operation” is “×”. In addition, the production regulation in this case for “production by touch detection” is “◯”.

In addition, when the state of the gaming machine is “probability change (electric support)”, as in the case described above, the “design stop”, “reach”, “specific production”, “abnormal display screen” Is provided. In this case, the production regulation for the “production change function based on the production button operation” is “×”. In addition, the production regulation in this case for “production by touch detection” is “◯”.
<Specific examples of performance output timing in each state of the gaming machine>
<< Example of production output timing after changing settings >>

  Next, specific examples of the effect output in each state of the gaming machine will be described in relation to the above-mentioned “probability of effect” (FIGS. 24A and 24B). First, the timing chart of FIG. 28 shows an example of the effect output at the time of setting change. More specifically, FIG. 28 shows an example of the effect output in the period from when the setting change is started with power-on to when the setting change ends and the standby state is entered. Further, in the relationship with the gaming state shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, “C1: Special state” “C3: Setting change (probability change) state” and “B1: Game standby state” “B11: This corresponds to a situation in which “game standby A (normal demonstration display)” shifts to “B12; game standby state B (design stopped)”.

  The “control state” shown at the top of FIG. 28 indicates the state of the gaming machine, and this “control state” is “initializing” in which the above-described initial setting process (FIG. 15) is performed when the power is turned on. The operation shifts to a “setting change mode” in which the setting change process (FIG. 16) is performed by the setting key operation. Further, after the setting change is completed, the process shifts to the “normal mode” and shifts to the standby state (game standby state) as described above. Under such a premise, when there is an effect button or touch detection, the influence on the state-corresponding output and the touch effect performed at that time are shown in the subsequent stages.

  After the power is turned on and the initial setting is completed, when the setting change mode is entered based on the setting key being inserted, the corresponding “image display” during the setting change is displayed as shown in “Status output”. "Audio output" and "Lamp output" are performed. When the operation button 22 or the like is operated in this state, the state-corresponding output does not change, and the corresponding “image”, “sound”, and “lamp” output continues during the setting change. On the other hand, if the touch detection changes from “None” to “Yes” while the setting is being changed, the state-corresponding output will not change, but the touch detection will have changed, as in the case where the production button is operated. A lamp effect indicating that is executed for a certain period of time. Thereafter, when the touch detection is changed from “present” to “absent”, the touch effect is not executed and the state-corresponding output does not change.

  Here, as an output related to “image display” during the setting change, for example, an output as shown in FIG. Specifically, the message “Settings are being changed” and the message “Settings are being changed. After completing the setting changes, a message will be displayed when the frame door is closed. Yes. In addition, although illustration is omitted, the output of “setting change” related to “audio output” can be exemplified as the output of “setting change is in progress”, and “setting changing” related to “lamp display” As an output of “”, an example of driving a predetermined plurality of LEDs in a pattern determined in advance as an output of “setting change” can be exemplified.

  Next, when the above-described setting change is completed and the setting change process ends, the control state shifts to the normal mode. At this time, the state-corresponding output is “image display”, for example, “standby screen A” as shown in FIG. In addition, voice output indicating “change completed” such as “setting change completed” is performed as “voice output”. Furthermore, regarding “lamp display”, “demo display” is performed with the drive pattern at the time of the standby demonstration. Further, upon completion of the setting change, the touch effect prohibition timer related to “J: setting of permission timing” in FIG. 23 is cleared, and the restriction of the touch effect in the standby screen thereafter is released.

  In this state, when the touch detection changes from “none” to “present”, touch notification corresponding to the state of the standby screen A is executed. Specifically, the voice of the character appearing on the gaming machine as an effect related to the above-mentioned character or an effect that promotes the game is output, such as “Please come and enjoy pachinko today!” A lamp display linked to voice is executed, or a character image is displayed in the display area (see FIGS. 25 and 34 (a) if necessary). Since the touch detection is set to change from “No” to “Yes” as an opportunity for the standby screen to change from A to B, the image display related to notification is as shown in FIG. When the standby screen B is displayed, a character image or a character display such as “Welcome ♪” is executed. After the effect prohibit timer is cleared, the effect prohibit timer is set when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes”, and when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No” The counting of the prohibition timer is started, and a more specific processing mode for the effect output accompanying such touch detection will be described later.

  Next, when the standby screen A is displayed, the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes”, and after the touch notification effect and the state change to the standby screen B are performed based on this, the touch detection is performed again. When it is performed, processing such as effects based on touch detection changes depending on the timing at which the touch detection is performed. FIG. 28 exemplifies a case where the touch detection changes from “none” to “present” when the standby screen A is displayed, and then the presentation timer count time is not “0”. In such a case, the touch effect is not executed. In addition, the touch effect prohibition timer according to “J: setting of permission timing” described above is set to an initial value (for example, 60 seconds). After that, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, the presentation prohibition timer starts timing.

  As described above, as described in the flow from turning on the power to changing to the normal mode (standby screen) through the setting change mode, the effect based on the touch detection is the gaming state of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The presence / absence of execution and the execution contents are set according to the effect permission regulation conditions shown in FIG. Here, the production prohibition timer according to the production permission regulation condition will be described in detail.

  The effect prohibition timer is a time measuring timer for determining whether or not the execution of the effect based on the change is allowed when the “touch detection” is changed. Further, the production prohibition timer functions as a timekeeping timer in “H1: Timekeeping timer processing (addition / subtraction / clearing, etc.)” shown in FIG. 23 and an internal timer in “J: setting of permission timing”. It is. For example, in the example of FIG. 28, when the setting change is completed, the effect prohibition timer is cleared. Then, a process for allowing execution of the touch effect is performed regardless of the time of the effect prohibition timer.

  Next, as shown in “image display” of “state corresponding output”, if touch detection is performed while “standby screen A” is displayed, the touch effect is not allowed for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) thereafter. In addition, a process of setting “60 seconds” in the effect prohibition timer is performed. When the CPU 521 is informed that the finger has moved away from the firing handle (20) and the touch detection has changed (in this case, it has been turned off from on), a process of starting subtraction of the effect prohibition timer is performed.

  After the above subtraction is started (while the effect prohibition timer is being subtracted), if touch detection is detected again before the effect prohibition timer becomes “0”, the effect prohibition timer again receives time (for example, 60 seconds), and when the state changes to a state different from the touch detection, the presentation prohibition timer starts counting. That is, a process for controlling the touch effect not to be executed for a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) after the last change of the touch is recognized.

Note that the production prohibition timer is used when the production related to touch detection is executed both when the touch detection changes from “No” to “Yes” and when the touch detection changes from “Yes” to “No”. Each case can be provided.
<< Example of production output in adjustment screen state >>

  Next, an example of an effect output in the state of the “adjustment screen” related to the environment setting (customization) described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the state of the “adjustment screen”, the “control state” becomes “initial setting” when the power is turned on, and shifts to the “normal mode” upon power failure recovery (power failure recovery). It has shifted to the standby state (game standby state). Then, the environment setting is performed in the state of “adjustment screen”, the environment setting is completed, and a transition is made to a standby state. Further, in relation to the gaming state shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, “B13: gaming standby state (setting screen for production / sound etc.)” of “B1: gaming standby state”, “B11: gaming standby A (normal) (Demo display) ”.

  In the example of FIG. 29, when there is a power interruption return, the “image display” of “state corresponding output” is “standby screen A”. Furthermore, “audio output” is not performed, and “lamp display” is “demo display”.

  As shown in the lowermost part of the figure, when the “effect button” is operated, “image display” becomes the “adjustment screen” at the timing of the end of the operation detection. Furthermore, “sound output” becomes “sound during adjustment (irregular)”, which outputs (samples output) the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment operation (sample output) or adjusts the screen (for example, FIG. 33). (C)) The operation sound for moving the cursor in the middle can be output. In this case, since an input of an adjustment operation is required, it is handled as “irregular”.

  Further, the “lamp display” is “light emission during adjustment”. This performs light output in accordance with the light emission luminance (light quantity) set at that time. In the example of FIG. 29, the button operation of the “effect button” is detected, and “state corresponding output” is performed based on the timing at which the detection of the operation is completed. Based on the operation detection start timing, “state corresponding output” may be performed.

  In this state, if there is “touch detection”, “image display” in “touch effect” is not performed, but “voice effect” and “lamp effect” are performed in a touch notification mode. By preventing the “image display” from being performed in this way, it is possible to prevent an environment setting (customization) operation performed while viewing the screen display from being hindered. In addition, when the adjustment operation is completed as shown in the uppermost center portion in the figure, “image display” of “state corresponding output” becomes “standby screen A”. Furthermore, although “audio output” is not performed, “lamp display” can be in a “demo display” mode.

  In the example of FIG. 29, when “touch detection” is performed after the adjustment operation is completed, touch notification by “image display”, “sound production”, and “lamp display” is performed. When there is a touch notification at this time, the “image display” of “state corresponding output” is switched from “standby screen A” to “standby screen B”. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to an effect such as a change from “standby screen A” to “standby screen B”. For example, a touch notification (such as “Welcome” text display) is superimposed on “standby screen A”. Then, after that, the screen may be shifted to the “standby screen B”.

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 29, the effect prohibition timer is cleared when there is a power interruption return, and is set when there is touch detection. Furthermore, time measurement is started based on the end timing of touch detection, and then the value of the effect prohibition timer is “0”. Further, the production prohibition timer is set by the subsequent touch detection, and the timing is started based on the end timing of the touch detection.

In the example of FIG. 29, the setting is not a change in setting (normal) power recovery, so the effect prohibit timer is cleared after the power interruption is restored, and the time of the effect prohibit timer before the power interruption is determined. Regardless, the execution of the touch effect is allowed.
<< Example of production output on reach screen >>

  Next, an effect output example in a state where the reach effect is being performed (the state of the reach screen) will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the “reach screen” state, when the variation start condition for the special symbol (and the production symbol) is satisfied, the “control state” is indicated by the rising edge of the line “in design variation”. At the same time, symbol variation starts. At this time, since the game is normally in a game state, the “detection of touch” continues to be detected.

  In the example of FIG. 30, “image display” of “state corresponding output” is “standby screen B” until the symbol variation is started. Furthermore, “voice output” is an output of “BGM” corresponding to “standby screen B”, and “lamp display” is “demo display”. When symbol variation starts in this state, “image display” becomes “acceleration effect”. Examples of the “acceleration effect” include those in which the effect symbol (190) starts to fluctuate and are accelerated to a high-speed fluctuation.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 30, after “notice effect / listening (tempering) effect” etc. in “image display”, it becomes “symbol hearing” and reach occurs. Here, “notice production / listening (tempered) production etc.” means production of contents that provoke the expectation of reach generation through various notice productions. In addition, as the “symbol hearing”, for example, an effect for causing the player to hold the expectation that the effect design that temporarily stops for the second time and the combination of the effect design and the reach that is temporarily stopped for the first time are included. it can. In the “image display”, the “reach effect” is executed, and then the “design stop” effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery.

  Furthermore, in the “voice output”, “symbol changing voice” associated with the changing effect of the effect symbol 190 is output with the start of the symbol change. In the “lamp display”, “symbol changing lamp effect” associated with the changing effect of the effect symbol 190 is performed with the start of the symbol change.

  In such a reach effect, it is conceivable to execute a “touch effect” for preventing the player from releasing his / her hand from the firing handle (20). For example, in the example of FIG. 30, the state of “touch detection” that has been continued until then is temporarily interrupted during “reach effect”. Then, after that, there is a second “touch detection” in the period shown in FIG. 30, and after a certain detection period, the state is changed to “without touch detection”. Then, based on the timing at which the second touch detection is stopped, “predetermined display” is performed in “image display” of “touch effect”, “predetermined sound” is output in “sound effect”, and “lamp” “Predetermined light emission” is performed in “Direction”.

  As these “predetermined display”, “predetermined sound”, and “predetermined light emission”, it is possible to execute a notification effect relating to a game result or an effect that suppresses a game stop. For example, it may be possible to output a direct or indirect indication of the degree of expectation related to the occurrence of a reach or jackpot, or to output “predetermined display” or “predetermined audio” with the content of “Do not release your hands”. It is done. In addition, the character display (382) of “Hot!” In FIG. 37B described above also corresponds to the “predetermined display” here. In addition, when a “sound” effect or a “lamp” effect is accompanied, these correspond to “predetermined sound” or “predetermined light emission”.

Here, in the example of FIG. 30, counting without “touch detection” is started based on the start timing of “reach effect”. Then, the first detection of the state without “touch detection” after the start of the “reach effect” becomes the first “touch detection” without detection, and the subsequent detection of the state without “touch detection” in the example of FIG. There is no “touch detection” for the second time.
<< Example of production output in the state of the jackpot end demo screen >>

  Next, an effect output example in a state in which a jackpot end demonstration effect is being performed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the “control state” changes from the normal control state to the big hit control state by the start of the big hit, and when the big winning opening / closing control (round control related to the big hit game) ends, Become. Further, when the big hit demo state ends, the state returns to the normal control state. Here, in the example of FIG. 31, the jackpot start demonstration is performed before the jackpot start, but the illustration of the jackpot start demonstration is omitted with respect to the “control state”.

  When the big hit is started, the “image display” of the “state corresponding output” shifts from the “design stop” production to the “big hit production”. The “big hit production” includes production during and between rounds. Furthermore, the “voice output” shifts from the “symbol variation” to the “big hit effect”. The “big hit effect” related to “sound output” here includes a sound indicating the progress of the round (round progress sound) and a winning sound output (winning sound output) during the round.

  Further, the “lamp display” shifts from the “demo display” to the “big hit effect”. The “big hit effect” relating to the “lamp display” here includes an effect for a round or between rounds. Each “big hit effect” related to “image display”, “sound output”, and “lamp display” is performed until the end of the big prize opening / closing control. In the example of FIG. 31, “touch detection” at this time continues with “touch detection”.

  When the big prize opening / closing control is finished, the “image display” and “lamp display” of the “state corresponding output” shift to the respective “hit end demo display”. Further, the “voice output” shifts to “big hit end demo BGM and the like”. When the big hit demo ends, “image display” shifts to “symbol stop”. Furthermore, “sound output” and “lamp display” are stopped during “symbol stop”. When “design stop” of “image display” ends, “sound output” becomes “BGM”, and “lamp display” corresponds to the state of the subsequent gaming machine.

  Here, in FIG. 31, the reason why characters are not described in the diagram related to “lamp display” after “symbol stop” has ended (the reason why it is blank) depends on the state of the gaming machine. This is because it is difficult to specify in the figure. In the example of FIG. 31, “sound output” and “lamp display” are stopped during “symbol stop”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, BGM (game mode at that time) while the symbol is stopped For example) or a lamp display pattern, and these outputs may be performed.

  In the example of FIG. 31, after the winning opening opening / closing control is completed, the state is once without “touch detection”, and is changed to the state with “touch detection” during the subsequent big end demonstration. Furthermore, during the big hit end demonstration, a change to a state without “touch detection” and a change to a state with “touch detection” are performed.

  As for “touch effect”, “predetermined display” related to “image effect” and “predetermined sound” related to “audio effect” are based on the timing when “touch detection” is initially absent during the jackpot end demo. The “predetermined light emission” related to the “lamp effect” is also executed. The “predetermined display”, “predetermined sound”, and “predetermined light emission” at this time relate to, for example, effects for preventing forgetting to take game cards and game coins storing the amount of game media, and game results during jackpot control An effect for notification can be given.

  In the example of FIG. 31, the subsequent touch detection is detection with the first “touch detection”. Further, the subsequent touch detection during the jackpot end demonstration is the detection with the second “touch detection”. Then, based on the timing of the second “touch detection”, the “predetermined display” related to the “image effect”, the “predetermined sound” related to the “sound effect”, and the “predetermined light emission” related to the “ramp effect”. Is also executed.

  In this way, when “predetermined display”, “predetermined sound”, and “predetermined light emission” are performed a plurality of times (here, twice) during the same type of period (during the big hit end demonstration here), “predetermined display” It is desirable to change the elements such as the content and type of “predetermined sound” and “predetermined light emission”. For example, when an effect for preventing forgetting to take a game card or game coin is executed as the previous “touch effect”, an effect for informing about the game result under the big hit control as the subsequent “touch effect” It is possible to exemplify the production of contents that promote motivation for the next game.

As mentioned above, based on FIGS. 28-31, the example of the effect output in several states of the gaming machine has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the example of the effect output in other states can also be considered. is there.
<Example of production output after power interruption>
<< When the game is in a standby state (any of display screens A to C) when the power is turned off >>

  Next, an example of the effect output after the return from power interruption will be described. FIG. 32 (a) conceptually shows screen display control when the power of the gaming machine is in a game standby state when the power is turned off and then the power is turned on again (returned from the power interruption). . Here, as the game standby state, “B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)”, “B12: game standby B (during symbol stop)”, “B13: game standby C (setting of production / audio, etc.) Screen ") (standby screen A, standby screen B, production setting screen C, etc.).

  When the power supply is restored as shown at the left end of FIG. 32A after the power interruption occurs in the above-mentioned various gaming machine standby states, the sub-control means (here, the CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301) first becomes its own. After the initialization process, it waits for reception of a command (power recovery command) indicating power recovery from the main control means (here, the CPU 501 of the main board 102).

  At this time, no image is displayed on the image display device (in this case, the effect display device 60) (corresponding to “screen non-display” in the figure). Thereafter, the sub-main CPU 521 receives the power supply return command from the main CPU 501, and from the contents of the command, etc., it is determined that there is no RWM clear or setting change at the time of return, and that the gaming state is waiting for gaming. Then, a power recovery process based on the condition is performed, and the initialization process is terminated.

  When the initialization process is completed (corresponding to “Ready” in the figure), the sub-main CPU 521 performs a normal process (a process for updating a production random number, a lamp display control, a voice control, etc.) and an effect display device. In (60), a sub-main command for displaying the standby screen A is output regardless of which of the standby screens A to C is the display screen before the power is turned off. Furthermore, the sub-main CPU 521 executes a power-on notification process for notifying that the power is restored without clearing the RWM, after clearing the value of the clock timer for changing the screen (set to a predetermined value).

  As an example of the effect display by the power-on notification process, for example, the characters “Power has been restored” or “Energized” shown in FIG. 35A are displayed on the effect display device (60), and the gaming machine frame ( For example, the LED of 11) can be turned on with a predetermined lighting pattern. Furthermore, it is conceivable that the effect display by the power-on notification process is continuously executed for a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds). In the present embodiment, even if the power-on notification is being executed after the initialization process is completed, the operation means (the operation button (22) which is an effect button) is performed by the normal process described above. It is possible to determine the input and change the standby screen according to the input. Such power-on notification processing and normal processing are indicated as “power-on notification” and “normal processing (individual processing, command / operation means input waiting)” in the drawing. “Individual processing” means individual display control processing, random number update processing, time measurement processing, and the like.

  As described above, after the timekeeping timer is initialized by the completion of the initialization process, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed based on the timekeeping timer (the value of the timekeeping timer becomes “0” by subtraction). Or when the timekeeping timer reaches a predetermined value (30 seconds in this case), the standby screen display change time (corresponding to “time A”) has arrived, and the screen display is waited. The screen A is changed to the standby screen B. Then, a value corresponding to the time for changing from the standby screen B to the standby screen A again is set in the timing timer. For example, when the timekeeping timer is to be added, the arrival time “20 seconds” is set, and when the timekeeping timer is to be subtracted, a necessary value (for example, 2 ms) is set. 10000 etc., which becomes 0 in 20 seconds by subtraction every interrupt).

Then, as in the case of the standby screen A, when the predetermined time has elapsed after the standby screen B is displayed (for example, when the clock timer subtracts to “0”, or the clock timer is added) When “20 seconds” or the like), it is determined that the standby screen display change time (corresponding to “time B”) has arrived, and the screen display is changed from standby screen B to standby screen A. In addition, when a game is performed while the standby screen A and the standby screen B are displayed and a winning prize opening (62, 63) is won, the screen changes to the symbol variation screen and the launch handle 20 is touched. The screen transitions to the content corresponding to the touch detection (such as those in which “welcome” characters are superimposed and displayed). In the example of FIG. 32A, it is assumed that there is no operation of the operation button (22) or touch detection.
<< When the pattern is changing when the power is turned off >>>>

  Next, based on FIG. 32 (b), an example of the effect output when the symbol is changing when the power is cut off will be described. FIG. 32B shows a concept of screen display control when power is cut off when the symbol is changing and no hold has occurred, and then the power is turned on again (returned from power interruption). Is shown.

  As described above, when the power supply is restored after the power interruption occurs in the state where the number of symbols on hold is 0, the sub-main CPU 521 first performs its own initialization process and then receives the power restoration command from the main CPU 501. wait. At this time, no image is displayed on the effect display device (60) (corresponding to “screen non-display” in the figure). After that, when a power supply return command is received from the main CPU 501 and it is determined from the command contents or the like that there is no RWM clear or setting change at the time of return, or that the gaming state is changing in design, The power recovery process based on the above is performed, and the initialization process is terminated.

  When the initialization process is completed (corresponding to “Ready” in the figure), the sub-main CPU 521 displays a power-on notification screen (for example, “Power is turned on” or FIG. 35 (b) on the effect display device (60). ) And the display indicating that the symbol is changing, and the like are maintained until a symbol stop command from the main board 102 is received. In the present embodiment, the power-on notification performed during the standby screen is different from the screen display. As an example of the power-on notification effect (power-on notification screen) at this time, the one shown in FIG. 35B can be adopted. In addition, even when the power-on notification is being executed after the initialization process is completed, the input of the operating means (effect button) is determined by the normal process, and if the input is valid, the input It is possible to execute processing according to the above. Such power-on notification output and normal processing are shown as “power-on notification screen” and “normal processing (individual processing, command / operation means input waiting)” in the drawing. “Individual processing” means individual display control processing, random number update processing, time measurement processing, and the like.

  When the CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301 receives the symbol stop command from the main board 102 (corresponding to the “stop command” in the figure), the symbol corresponding to the information based on the symbol stop command information or the information based on the power return command (in advance) If the symbol to be stopped can be grasped by the predetermined default symbol combination or information, the symbol change standby similar to the standby screen B as shown in FIG. 34 (c) is displayed. Display the screen. Here, in this embodiment, if the symbol is changing at the time of power-off (power-on recovery), the time-keeping timer is not initialized because the initialization process is completed, and the time-keeping timer is received at the timing when the stop command is received. Is set so that the standby screen B is always displayed after the stop command is received.

  After that, when the standby screen B is displayed, a predetermined time elapses after the standby screen B is displayed (when the timer is decremented to “0”, or the timer is added), as in the case of the game standby. It is determined that the standby screen display change time (corresponding to “time B” in the figure) has arrived, and the screen display is changed from standby screen B to standby screen A. In addition, when a game is performed while the power-on notification screen is displayed and the winning prize opening (62, 63) is won, the standby screen B is displayed in response to receiving the stop command, and then the screen changes to the symbol variation screen. In addition, when the launch handle (20) is touched, the screen transitions to the content corresponding to the touch detection (such as the one in which “Welcome” characters are superimposed and displayed).

Although illustration is omitted, in both cases of FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), the initial operation confirmation process that is normally performed for the movable effect member that is a movable accessory is an initialization process. It can be executed later in parallel with these display processes, and the process is executed until the confirmation of the initial operation of the movable accessory is completed without being related to the display transition of the screen (the screen display is shown in FIG. 32 (a) and (b) are performed, while the operation for confirming the movable accessory is performed). Further, until the confirmation of the initial action of the movable accessory is completed, the execution of the effect of the movable accessory associated with the symbol variation is controlled. In the example of FIG. 32B, it is assumed that there is no operation of the operation button (22) or touch detection. Further, an effect pattern in which the movable accessory is operated is selected by operating the player's operation button (22), and the effect pattern is generated (executed) during the initial operation of the movable effect member, and the player actually When the operation button (22) is operated, the execution (actual driving) of the effect of the movable effect member is restricted.
<Touch detection, touch production and other characteristics>

  The touch detection and touch effects described so far can be considered as follows. First, for a touch effect (launch detection effect) executed during standby (while in standby screen A or standby screen B), a game is actually performed by detecting a firing operation (touch detection and detection of a change in the firing intensity volume). The execution time of the touch effect is shorter than the actual measurement value (for example, an average value related to a plurality of actual measurements) until the ball is launched and enters the start winning opening (for example, the first starting winning opening 62). can do. It is conceivable that the touch effect in this case is completed in about 3 seconds.

  Contrary to this, for the touch effect (launch detection effect) executed during standby (during standby screen A or standby screen B), the firing operation is detected (touch detection and firing intensity volume change detection). Thus, the execution time of the touch effect is more than the actually measured value (for example, the average value related to the plurality of actual measurements) until the game ball is actually launched and enters the start winning opening (for example, the first starting winning opening 62). The touch effect may be about 20 seconds in that case. In this case, if the notice effect is generated in response to the ball entering the first start winning opening (62) during the execution of the 20-second touch effect, the notice effect is displayed in a predetermined first group (for example, a character is displayed). If it is a simple notice such as a dialogue notice of the content that gives a dialogue, the touch effect is kept executed, and this notice effect is given to another predetermined second group (for example, a movie notice using the full screen of the display device, etc.) If it is a non-simplified notice), the touch effect may be interrupted.

  Moreover, although it cannot normally occur, even if touch detection is performed after the rotation operation of the firing handle (20) (while the handle is rotated), the touch effect (launch detection effect) can be executed.

  Furthermore, when there is a start opening prize during execution of the touch effect (launch detection effect), the touch effect can be prevented from being interrupted. However, in the case of a touch effect such as voice, the volume may be continued as “zero” according to the priority of the effect at the time of winning the start opening. In addition, the touch effect may be interrupted if there is a start opening prize during execution of the touch effect (launch detection effect).

  Furthermore, when an error is detected and an error notification is executed during the execution of the touch effect, the error notification can be prioritized over the touch effect. In addition to this, the touch effect and the error notification may be output in duplicate. For example, the touch effect is interrupted when the first error (illegal prize error, porcelain detection error, etc.) is detected, but the touch effect is not interrupted with the second error (fire direction inappropriate error, door opening error, etc.). It is possible to adopt a control mode.

  In addition, when a touch effect is executed during volume adjustment at the time of customization (environment setting), audio output related to the touch effect is output according to the volume adjusted at the start of the touch effect even during the volume adjustment. It is possible to do it.

  In addition, it is possible to prohibit touch effects during volume adjustment during customization (environment settings), and prevent touch effects from being executed even if touch effects are performed in other situations. is there.

The touch effect (launch detection effect) is interrupted when a game ball is detected, for example, at the start winning opening (62, 63) during execution, but at the operation opening (68) or the general winning opening (72). It is also possible to adopt a control mode in which no interruption is made when a game ball is detected.
<Operation detection signal>

  Next, various possible examples of operation detection signals (touch detection signals) related to touch detection will be described. As described above, when considering various aspects of the effect output related to the touch effect, it is possible to specifically examine the operation detection signal related to the touch detection operation, to ensure the reliability of the effect control, etc. Is important in terms of First, with regard to the operation detection signal, it may be considered to examine “1. Use of operation detection signal”, “2. Transmission method of operation detection signal”, “3a. Processing when operation detection signal is received”, etc. It is done.

  Among these, “1. Application of operation detection signal” can be used for various types of processing or triggered by various types of processing. For example, the operation detection signal can be “(1) Guarantee of operation by player”. Further, the operation detection signal includes “(2) Triggering time between demo state and normal state”, “(3) Triggering time transition to special performance state”, “(4) Triggering time from power saving mode”, “( 5) External output opportunity ”,“ (6) Suggestion of launch etc. (method change) opportunity ”,“ (7) Use for production (its opportunity) ”,“ (8) Use for fixed handle detection and notification ”,“ ( 9) “Use for changing the production frequency”.

  In addition, as a signal generation method when using the operation detection signal as the above-mentioned “(2) Triggering time between the demo state and the normal state”, the detection signal of the touch detection unit is used as the dedicated detection unit for the sub-main substrate (301). It is possible to adopt the method of outputting from (first method). An example of the dedicated detection unit for the sub-main substrate 301 is a touch detection unit (touch sensor) in which an output signal is input only to the sub-main substrate (301).

  Further, as another signal generation method, a method (second method) in which some processing (signal processing) is performed on the signal (detection signal) of the dedicated detection unit described above can be employed. In this case, on the premise that a common detection unit (common detection unit) in which an output signal is input to both the main substrate (102) and the sub main substrate (301) is used, the signal from the common detection unit is used. It is possible to use some processing (signal processing).

  Furthermore, a method of synthesizing the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the common detection unit with other signals (third method) can be considered. In this case, output state information appearing in “other signals” is synthesized with the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the common detection unit, and the main board (102) or sub-board is used as a reference signal for detection related to a change in the operation state. It is conceivable to output to the main board (301).

  As a feature of the first method and the second method described above, since it is not necessary to perform synthesis with other signals, processing and equipment for signal generation are not required as compared with the third method. The configuration may be simplified.

  Further, as another feature of the second method described above, the generation of input signals to a plurality of different input objects (here, the main board (102) and the sub main board (301)) can be made common. Compared with the case where the input signal is individually generated for the target, the processing and the device configuration may be simplified. In consideration of the effects of chattering on the touch switch (310), it is conceivable to increase the detection accuracy by requiring a touch of a certain time (for example, 50 ms) or more. Of course, it is also possible to configure so that an output can be obtained during continuous detection for a predetermined time by using a capacitor having a suitable capacitance.

  Further, as a feature of the third method, processing on the main substrate (102) and the sub main substrate (301) is performed using a signal in a form other than the form of the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the common detection unit. it can. For this reason, it is possible to perform processing on the main board (102) and the sub-main board (301) without being limited only to the form of the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the common detection unit.

  As for the above-mentioned “2. Operation detection signal transmission method”, the processing form in each control board can be considered according to the transmission path of the operation detection signal. For example, regarding the section from the touch sensor (310) to the launch control board (105), the signal line used for transmission from the touch sensor (310) shall be “(1) common with launch control”. Or, “(2) Separate from launch control” may be considered.

  Here, as a mode in which the signal lines are common, if the touch sensor (310) is a three-wire sensor, three signal lines (power supply line, output) derived from the touch sensor (310) are used. If signal lines, GND, etc. are used in common and the touch sensor (310) is a two-wire sensor, the two signal lines (output signal line and GND) derived from the touch sensor (310) are used. Or an output signal line and a power supply line) that are used in common.

  In addition, regarding the section from the launch control board (105) to the prize ball control board (payout control board 103), the signal line used for transmission is “(1) independent signal line (output only for effects)”. Or “(2) common with other control signals”. Among these, in the case of “(2) common with other control signals”, it is conceivable to adopt a form (composite format) in which the transmission timing is different.

  Furthermore, regarding the section from the prize ball control board (payout control board 103) to the main control board (main board 102), “(1) independent signal lines” or “(2) other control signals and “Common”. Among these, in the case of “(2) common with other control signals”, a form (composite form) in which transmission / reception is performed in a command form (command form) or a transmission timing is changed. It is conceivable to send and receive with. Regarding the transmission timing, a signal transmission mode in which transmission is not performed in a specific case can be considered.

  Furthermore, regarding the section from the main control board (main board 102) to the effect control board (sub-main board 301), “(1) independent signal lines” or “(2) common with other control signals”. ". Among these, in the case of “(1) independent signal lines”, for example, it is conceivable to transmit and receive signals at regular intervals (periodically). Further, when “(2) common with other control signals” is used, transmission / reception is performed in a command format as in the section from the prize ball control board (payout control board 103) to the main control board (main board 102). Or a composite format. Furthermore, it is conceivable that the signal transmission timing is determined based on the relationship with the content and type of the previous transmission information.

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned “3a. Processing when an operation detection signal is received” can be divided into various gaming states. The gaming states are: “(1) Normal game”, “(2) Special game (per game)”, “(3) Abnormal”, “(4) Preparation (power interruption recovery / power interruption) Processing) ”,“ (5) during demonstration (not operated) ”, and“ (6) during demonstration (my patch operation / production setting operation) ”.

  Among these gaming states, “(1) During normal gaming” includes a high base state and a low base state. Further, when an operation detection signal related to touch detection is received in the launch control board (105), it is conceivable to perform “(1) launch control process only when common with the launch process”. This means that when the touch detection signal is received at the same time as the process related to the launch control, only the process related to the launch control is performed and the process based on the touch detection signal is not performed. Yes.

  It can also be considered that “(2) Ignore in a case different from that for launch control”. This means that processing based on touch detection is not performed when a touch detection signal is received when processing related to launch control is not performed.

  Subsequently, on the prize ball control board (payout control board 103) and the main control board (main board 102), it is conceivable to store information related to touch detection until a command to be transmitted is transmitted. Further, in the main control board (main board 102), on the basis of the information of touch detection, for example, the influence lottery effect lottery such as a variation pattern (variation P) lottery is not or is not given. It is possible to do so.

  Subsequently, in the effect control board (sub-main board 301), based on the information of touch detection, the selection target is branched in determining an effect (variation effect, pre-reading effect, etc.) different from the effect related to the success or failure ( It is conceivable that the production is selected if they are different. In addition, even if information based on touch detection is received, processing based on the information may not be performed, or determination processing may be performed on reception of the information, but no special processing may be performed.

The processing related to “(1) Normal game” described here is the other “(2) Special game (per game)”, “(3) Abnormal”, “(4) Preparing (electric) It is also possible to employ the state as appropriate even in the states of “break recovery / power interruption processing”, “(5) during demonstration (not operated)”, and “(6) during demonstration (my patch operation / production setting operation)”. Here, the “my-patch operation” means, for example, displaying a two-dimensional code for providing information to the player, or information communication with the player's portable information terminal (smartphone or the like) via communication with the Internet server. This means an operation for providing a service. Further, “production setting operation” means an operation for the above-described environment setting (customization).
<Operational effects of the invention according to the present embodiment>

  As described above, various control elements are examined with respect to the relationship between touch detection and effect output, and various control elements are applied by adopting appropriate control elements from those examined and applying them to the pachinko gaming machine 10. It is possible to execute a production based on the above. And it becomes possible to utilize operation detection of the launching handle including touch detection more effectively than before.

  For example, as described above, “D: content of touch effect” is variously assumed, and for example, “D1: effect output destination”, “D2: effect data”, “D3: only change state” is subdivided. By adopting the control processing related to the production output and adopting it in the pachinko gaming machine 10, various productions based on the steering wheel operation are possible. The effects based on the steering wheel operation are further subdivided based on control elements such as “D1: effect output destination”, “D2: effect data”, “D3: only change state”. Is possible.

  In addition, as described above, “E: Selection criteria for touch effects” are variously assumed. For example, “E1: gaming state (at touch timing)”, “E2: number of operations”, “E3: customization setting” By subdividing them into control processes relating to the production output and adopting them in the pachinko gaming machine 10, various productions based on the steering wheel operation become possible. The effects based on the steering wheel operation are further subdivided based on control elements such as “E1: gaming state (at touch timing)”, “E2: number of operations”, “E3: customization setting”, etc. Is possible.

  In the same manner as described above for “F: change in production state”, “G: change in production”, “H: things related to trigger parameters for touch production”, etc., various subdivided control elements are determined in the same manner. By adopting the machine 10, various effects based on the steering wheel operation can be performed. Furthermore, the permission condition and the regulation condition for the production are defined as “J: setting of permission timing”, and “K: change in touch state”, “L: touch detection method”, “M: sub” as other control elements. By appropriately selecting these and applying them to the pachinko gaming machine 10, the effects based on the steering wheel operation can be further diversified.

  Then, by conducting a detailed examination of the touch effects as described above and executing the touch effects according to the state of the gaming machine, the touch effects in a manner based on the balance with the effects that have been continued before the touch detection. Can be executed. The touch effects can be combined with other effects without interfering with other effects, and the touch effects can be diversified also by this combination.

Further, by executing the touch effects for the plurality of touch detections, it is possible to diversify the entire effects by continuing the intermittent touch effects.
<Summary of Examples>

As described above, various aspects have been exemplified for effects based on touch detection, but these can be summarized as follows.
<Summary 1>
In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. With a pachinko machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when a symbol (such as a special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode. The main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game, and the transmission information (main command, etc.) transmitted from the main control means, connected to the main control means in a communicable manner. A sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that performs control processing according to the game, an effect output means (such as an effect display device, a speaker, and various LEDs) that outputs an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and a player Contact Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) to be output, and rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting a player's rotation operation. Some of them are triggered by touch detection (such as touch effects).
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed (such as “B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”), the symbol game, There is a game running state (such as “B2: gaming state”) in which any one of the special games is being executed, and in the game standby state, the output contents of effects by the sub-control means Including a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (power-saving)”, etc.), and any of the plurality of types of game standby states Depending on whether it is a state, whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or an effect output triggered by the touch detection can be different.
As a result, various effects can be executed by more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 2>

In another invention according to this embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. In response to this, a pattern game (special symbol, etc.) is displayed as a symbol game, then stopped and displayed, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a player a profit is performed. A main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game, and transmission information (main command) connected to the main control means so as to be communicable and transmitted from the main control means A sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that performs control processing according to the control, an effect output means (such as a speaker) that outputs sound as an effect under the control of the sub-control means, and a player's contact To detect Touch detection means (such as a touch switch), and rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting a player's rotation operation, wherein the effect output means is configured to detect the player's contact with the touch detection means. A game standby state in which voice output (sound output, etc.) can be executed upon detection of touch detection, and neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed as the state of the pachinko gaming machine. State ("B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)" etc.) and a game running state ("B2: game in progress" etc.) in which either the symbol game or the special game is being executed The game standby state includes a plurality of types of game standby states (such as “B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (power saving)”), Depending on which game standby state of the game standby state, whether or not a sound is output when triggered by the touch detection and / or the sound output when triggered by the touch detection differs Configured to get.
Thereby, various audio effects can be executed by more effectively utilizing the detection detection of the launch handle.
<Summary 3>

In another invention according to this embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. In response to this, a pattern game (special symbol, etc.) is displayed as a symbol game, then stopped and displayed, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a player a profit is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
Sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing in accordance with transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for producing production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting a player's rotation operation,
A production operation section (operation buttons, cross keys, etc.) operated by the player during the production,
In the production, there is an output (such as a touch production) triggered by touch detection that is detection of a player's contact by the touch detection means,
The pachinko gaming machine has a gaming standby state (such as “B1: gaming standby state (normal demonstration display)”) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed,
The game standby state includes a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (power saving)”) in which the output contents of the effects by the sub-control means are different. Including
Whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and / or an effect execution condition is set so that the effect output triggered by the touch detection can be different,
The conditions defined as the performance execution conditions include which game standby state among the plurality of types of game standby states, at which timing the touch detection is performed, and before the touch detection timing. Includes whether or not the production operation unit has been operated.
Accordingly, it is possible to execute a touch effect associated with the operation state of the effect operation unit while more effectively using the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 4>

In another invention according to this embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. In response to this, a pattern game (special symbol, etc.) is displayed as a symbol game, then stopped and displayed, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a player a profit is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
Sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing in accordance with transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for producing production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the player's rotation operation,
In the production, there is an output (such as a touch production) triggered by touch detection that is detection of a player's contact by the touch detection means,
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state (such as “B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed, and the symbol game A game running state (such as “B2: gaming state”) in which any of the special games is being executed;
The pachinko gaming machine includes backup means (such as a backup area of the main board) capable of storing the gaming state of the pachinko machine when a power interruption occurs when a power interruption occurs due to a decrease in supply voltage,
Whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and / or an effect execution condition is set so that the effect output triggered by the touch detection can be different,
The conditions defined as the performance execution conditions include the timing of the touch detection and the gaming state of the pachinko machine stored in the backup unit when the power is turned off. The game standby state includes a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (power saving)”) in which the output contents of the effects by the sub-control means are different. Including
Depending on which of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state, whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or an effect output triggered by the touch detection Are configured to be different.
This makes it possible to execute an appropriate touch effect immediately after the power is turned on while more effectively using the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 5>

In another invention according to this embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. In response to this, a special game that can give a profit to the player when the symbol (such as a special symbol) is variably displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode. A pachinko machine to perform,
As the symbol game, the variation time of the symbol is set as one variation time from a plurality of variation times,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
Sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing in accordance with transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for producing production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting a player's rotation operation,
And time measuring means (time timer etc.) for measuring time,
In the production, there is an output (such as a touch production) triggered by touch detection that is detection of a player's contact by the touch detection means,
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed (such as “B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”),
A game executing state (“B2: in-game state” or the like) in which either the symbol game or the special game is being executed;
The elapsed time in the game standby state is counted based on the timing means,
Initializing means for setting the timekeeping time of the timekeeping means to an initial value based on the touch detection;
When the elapsed time in the game standby state reaches a predetermined time by the time counting means, an output of an effect triggered by subsequent touch detection is permitted (“J11: Characteristic with time (variable / 1 fluctuation and ) ")),
The predetermined time is set to a time shorter than the longest variation time (such as 180 seconds) of the plurality of variation times.
Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately set the allowable timing of the touch effect while further effectively using the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 6>

In another invention according to this embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. In response to this, a special game that can give a profit to the player when the symbol (such as a special symbol) is variably displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode. A pachinko machine to perform,
As the symbol game, the variation time of the symbol is set as one variation time from a plurality of variation times,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
Sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing in accordance with transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for producing production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting a player's rotation operation,
A production operation unit operated by the player during the production,
And time measuring means (time timer etc.) for measuring time,
In the production, there is an output (such as a touch production) triggered by touch detection that is detection of a player's contact by the touch detection means,
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed (such as “B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”),
A game executing state (“B2: in-game state” or the like) in which either the symbol game or the special game is being executed;
The elapsed time in a predetermined game standby state is counted based on the timing means,
Initializing means for setting the timekeeping time of the timekeeping means to an initial value based on the touch detection;
When the elapsed time in the game standby state reaches a predetermined time by the time measuring means, an output of an effect triggered by subsequent touch detection is permitted (“J2: Combined with other elements”, etc.) ,
Even if the production operation unit is operated before the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time (such as 5 seconds) in the game standby state, the touch detection is performed when the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time. The output of the performance triggered by is allowed.
Accordingly, it is possible to execute the touch effect regardless of the operation of the effect operation unit while effectively using the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 7>

In another invention according to the present embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. In response to this, a pattern game (such as a special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, then stopped and displayed, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a player a profit is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
Sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing in accordance with transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) that outputs production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting a player's rotation operation,
And time measuring means (time timer etc.) for measuring time,
In the production, there is an output (such as a touch production) triggered by touch detection, which is detection of a player's contact by the touch detection means,
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed (such as “B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”), the symbol game, A game running state (such as “B2: gaming state”) in which any of the special games is being executed;
The pachinko gaming machine is provided with backup means (such as a backup area of the main board) capable of storing the gaming state of the pachinko machine when a power interruption occurs when a power interruption occurs due to a decrease in supply voltage,
Normal recovery operation for returning the gaming state of the pachinko machine after the power restoration to the gaming state of the pachinko machine before the power interruption based on the contents stored in the backup means when the power is restored from the power interruption (Returning operation in the case of NO in S111 and S113) and the gaming state of the pachinko machine after the power return to the game standby state regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine before the power interruption stored in the backup means Specific return operation (return operation in the case of YES in S113) is possible,
Whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and / or an effect execution condition is set so that the effect output triggered by the touch detection can be different,
The conditions defined as the performance execution conditions include the gaming state of the pachinko machine after returning from the power-off and whether or not the elapsed time in the gaming standby state has reached a predetermined time by the timing means, And
Regardless of whether the return is made by the normal return operation or the return by the specific return operation when the power is restored from the power-off, the time keeping time of the time measuring means is set to a predetermined value (5 seconds or the like). Yes.
Thereby, execution control of an appropriate touch effect can be performed even after the power supply is restored while more effectively using the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 8>

In another invention according to this embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. In response to this, a pattern game (special symbol, etc.) is displayed as a symbol game, then stopped and displayed, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a player a profit is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
Sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing in accordance with transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for producing production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the player's rotation operation,
The main control means includes
Profit can be given to the player according to the result of the game, and settings relating to the profit grant to the player (setting of the player's advantage level, etc.) are possible.
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, including a setting change state capable of performing the setting, and a normal state different from the setting change state,
In the setting change state, the effect is not output based on the detection by the touch detection unit regardless of the change mode of the detection state of the touch detection unit and / or the detection mode of the rotation operation detection unit. Has been.
Accordingly, it is possible to limit the touch effect to the setting operation while further effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle.
<Summary 9>

In another invention according to this embodiment, a game ball is launched into a game area, and a game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. In response to this, a pattern game (special symbol, etc.) is displayed as a symbol game, then stopped and displayed, and when the stopped and displayed symbol is in a predetermined display mode, a special game that can give a player a profit is performed. Machine,
Main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
Sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing in accordance with transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Production output means (production display device, speaker, various LEDs, etc.) for producing production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means (such as a touch switch) for detecting a player's contact;
Rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting the player's rotation operation,
The main control means is capable of launching a game ball with an intensity according to the amount of rotation detected by the rotation operation detection means on condition that touch detection is detection of a player's contact by the touch detection means,
In the production, there is an output (such as a touch production) triggered by the touch detection,
The main control means includes
After the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, even if the game ball enters the start winning port before the touch detection means detects the player's contact, the change display of the symbol is displayed. And transmitting information corresponding to the symbol variation display to the sub-control means.
Thereby, the presence or absence of touch detection can prevent the progress of the symbol game from being restricted while more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the firing handle. <Other embodiments>

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the various embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation is possible. For example, the present invention provides a pachinko gaming machine in which a game ball as a game medium acquired by a player is directly paid out to the player as described above so that the player can touch the prize ball. For example, the present invention can also be applied to a sealed circulation pachinko game machine (management game machine) that circulates and uses game balls inside a game machine. Further, as the enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine, one that can electromagnetically record the entry and exit of the game medium can be exemplified.

  In addition, the present invention includes a plurality of reels arranged with a predetermined number of symbols, controls the start and stop of rotation of the reels based on the player's operation, and plays a game medal or the like according to the winning combination The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine (rotating game machine) that performs payout of a medium (including storage in a storage device). When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, instead of detecting a handle operation, it can be detected by a player when a bet button is operated, or by a player when a bet is set. Based on the detection of the insertion of game medals, it is possible to apply an effect output according to the state of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to, for example, a casino machine installed in a casino facility.

10 Pachinko machines, 20 launch handles, 50 game boards, 52 game areas,
53 main control display device, 62 first start winning opening, 63 second starting winning opening,
70 1st special symbol display part, 71 2nd special symbol display part, 90 grand prize device,
102 main board, 104 sub board, 113 first success / failure judging means,
117 second win / fail judgment means, 120 special game control means, 301 sub-main board,
302 sub-sub board, 310 touch sensor, 311 launch intensity volume 311,
501 CPU of main board, 521 CPU of sub main board.

Claims (1)

A game ball is fired in the game area, and after the game ball has entered the start winning opening formed in the game area, the pattern is variably displayed as a symbol game, and then stopped and displayed. A pachinko gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a player a profit when the display mode is
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub-control unit that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs a control process according to transmission information transmitted from the main control unit;
Production output means for outputting production under the control of the sub-control means,
Touch detection means for detecting a player's contact;
A rotation operation detecting means for detecting the rotation operation of the player,
In the production, there is an output that is triggered by touch detection, which is detection of a player's contact by the touch detection means,
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, there is a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed, and a state where either the symbol game or the special game is being executed. A game running state,
The game standby state includes a plurality of types of game standby states in which the output contents of effects by the sub-control means are different,
Depending on which of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state, whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or an effect output triggered by the touch detection Are configured to be different ,
As the starting prize opening, a first starting prize opening and a second starting prize opening are provided,
An opening / closing member is attached to the second start winning opening,
The game area is provided with an operating port through which a game ball can enter,
The opening and closing member is driven when a game ball enters the operation port, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning port,
In the situation where the power supply is restored while the touch detection means is in contact before the power is turned on, the effect triggered by the touch detection is not output,
During the output of the effect triggered by the touch detection, when a game ball enters the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, the effect triggered by the touch detection being output is interrupted, A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that, even when a game ball enters the operating port, the production triggered by the touch detection during output is continued without interruption .